|
®
QMS magicolor LX
Printer User’s Guide
1800409-001A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dear Customer,
Mark Twain once said that only two things in life are certain: death and taxes.
Well, if he were living today, we’re sure he’d add manuals to this list. Just about
everything you buy is accompanied by a manual—and your new QMS printer is
no exception. Now, we know that even though we’ve devoted our lives to writing
manuals, very few people actually enjoy reading them. So we’ve written this
manual with you in mind. However, there are more of you out there than there are
printers, and you all need something different. Because of this, we’ve tried to
design your manual to help you reach your destination as easily as possible:
Table of Contents—Use this section as a road map to discover what there is to
see in the manual and how the sections are related.
Overview of the Documentation—This section functions as a Welcome Center.
It’ll give you an idea about what’s in this city (your user’s guide) as well as in
other nearby cities (other useful documentation).
Overview of the Manual—As long as you’re at the Welcome Center, you
probably wanta list of localattractions. This section lets you know which chapters
you really shouldn’t miss and which you need to visit only if you have the time
and interest, or a special purpose. It’s pretty much the same information as in the
table of contents, but in a descriptive format.
Headers, Footers, and Tab Dividers—Use these features as road signs to help
you locate the section of the manual you want to visit.
Index—While some people like to wander through a city, stopping wherever they
find something interesting, others like to call ahead to make a reservation for a
specific hotel or restaurant. OurBlue Pagesspeed you to the information you want
quickly and without unnecessary detours. Easy on, easy off. We think you’ll find
thebluecolorespeciallyusefulwhenyou havemorethanonemanualin thebinder.
We hope you enjoy your new QMS printer (and traveling through its manuals,
too!).
Your QMS Technical Writer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
♦
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Introduction
Convenient Control Panel Operation. . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
PS Executive Series Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Chapter 2
Initial Printer Setup
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Finding a Good Location for Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
What’s Included in the Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
QMS Product Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Unpacking the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Installing Developer and Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . 2-11
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the Waste Toner Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Installing the OPC Belt Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Filling the Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Chapter 3
Connecting the Printer
About Macintosh Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
PS Executive Series Printer Utility Software . . . . 3-13
Installing a Color PostScript Printer Driver . . . . . 3-13
Installing the Windows 3.1 Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Printer Description Files (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Testing Parallel Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Testing Serial Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Checking Serial Communication Settings. . . . . . . 3-20
i i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Printer Configuration
Printer Configuration Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Operator Control/Chain Inputbins. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Operator Control/Color Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Operator Control/Color Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Operator Control/Manual Feed Size . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
The Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Administration/Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Administration/Emulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
i i i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Administration/Special Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Header/Trailer Page Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Header/Trailer Information Commands . . . . . . . . 4-56
Chapter 5
Printing on 3-Hole or Other Pre-punched Media. . . . . 5-8
Printing on Thick Paper Stocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Media Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Collating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Configuring the Printer for Collation . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Changing Print Job Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Adjusting Print Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Cancelling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
i v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending an End-of-Job Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Diagnostic and Special Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Chapter 6
Consumables and Preventative Maintenance
Replacing a Developer Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Replacing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle. . . . . . 6-12
Replacing the Waste Toner Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Moving the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Removing and Replacing
General Tips for Extending Printer Life . . . . . . . . 6-26
Cleaning the Charger Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cleaning the Pre-Charger Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Cleaning Register and Transfer Rollers . . . . . . . . 6-34
Cleaning the Paper Exit Rollers and Plates. . . . . . 6-37
Cleaning the Paper-Feed Roller
and the Manual-Feed Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Cleaning the Exterior of Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Optimizing Color Output
Color Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Methods of Color Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Chapter 8
Printer Options
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Installing the Sheet Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Using the Envelope Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Font and Emulation Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Using Font and Emulation Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Security Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Using a Security Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Removing the Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Replacing the Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Single In-Line Memory Modules (SIMMs) . . . . . . . 8-22
* Pantone, Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color and color reproduction materials.
v i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using External Hard Disks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Identifying External Hard Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
Preventing Media Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Control Panel Selections Don’t Take Effect . . . . . 9-24
Data LED Stays Lit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
No Start-up Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Printer Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Printer Locks Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Blank Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Not All Pages Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
v i i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Placing a Service Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
SIMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Warranty Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
How Electrostatic Discharge
LocalTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
IBM PC/XT, PC/AT,
and Compatible Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Centronics Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Notes to the Centronics Parallel
Cable Pinouts Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
1284 Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Dataproducts Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
v i i i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Notices
Declaration of Manufacturer/Importer . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Electronics Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Proprietary Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Disk Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
MB Printer Mem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
System Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Hard Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Spooling Overflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
PS Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
PS Protocol Menu for
Optional Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Advantages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
i x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Updated DOCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
PCL 5 Emulation Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
Font Index Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Updated PCL 5 DOCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Glossary
Index
♦
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter provides a brief overview of the printer, an
explanation of the printer documentation, and an explanation of the
printer’s main features and benefits.
REMOTE
SWITCH
Fig. 1.1 The QMS magicolor LX
The magicolor LX produces 300 or 600 dpi color or monochrome
prints, using advanced color laser technology combined with the
QMS Crown multitasking printer operating system. The magicolor
LX prints in color at a rate of 3 to 6 pages per minute, and in
monochrome at12pagesperminute.Itprints on plain orlaserpaper
and on transparencies, envelopes, labels, and thick stock, and
supports letter, legal, executive, andA4mediasizes.Italsofeatures
an Energy Saver mode for reduced power consumption when not
printing. The printer ships with either 12 or 24 MB of RAM. See
“Printer Features,” later in this chapter, for a detailed list of your
printer’s capabilities.
I n t r o d u c t i o n
1 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
About This Manual
This User’s Guide is organized in three parts, Installation (chapters
1 through 3), Operation (chapters 4 through 6), and Reference (the
rest of the manual). A tab for each of these sections was included
with your manual: insert them at the beginning of the appropriate
chapters to make it easier to navigate the manual.
Installation
■ Chapter 1: Introduction
Gives an overview of the printer documentation and the
printer’s major features; it also discusses the QMS Crown
operating system and laser printing.
■ Chapter 2: Initial Printer Setup
Directs you in unpacking and installing the printer.
■ Chapter 3: Connecting the Printer
Discusses Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO) and
Emulation Sensing Processor (ESP) mode, and explains
how to connect the printer to a host through the LocalTalk,
parallel, or serial port.
Operation
■ Chapter 4: Printer Configuration
Describes control panel components and functions and
tells how to use the Configuration menu to configure the
printer to your printing requirements.
■ Chapter 5: Print Media and Daily Operations
Discusses print media sizes, loading, handling, and
storage. It also covers operations such as printing
1 - 2
I n t r o d u c t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
envelopes, transparencies, thick stock, and labels,
adjusting print density, and canceling or ending print jobs.
■ Chapter 6: Consumables and Preventative Maintenance
Guides you through handling and replacing consumables,
such as the toner, developer, cleaning pad, oil bottle, OPC
belt cartridge, and waste toner pack. It also covers moving
and preventative maintenance for the printer.
Reference
■ Chapter 7: Optimizing Color Output
Discusses QCOLOR, the QMS automatic color control
technology, explains how to fine-tune color options,
discusses color matching, and lists the printer’s typefaces.
■ Chapter 8: Printer Options
Describes installing and using optional printer hardware,
such as font, emulation, and security cards; memory
upgrades (SIMMs); hard disks; and network interface
cards. Also explains how to upgrade the system software.
■ Chapter 9: Troubleshooting
Explains how to clear jams and interpret status messages;
outlines possible print quality problems and solutions; and
explains how to place a service call.
■ Appendix A: QMS Customer Support
Lists sources of help and information.
■ Appendix B: Technical Specifications
Provides technical specifications for the printer and lists
available supplies and replacement parts. This appendix
also gives the recommended pinouts for LocalTalk, serial,
I n t r o d u c t i o n
1 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
IBM PC/XT, IBM PC/AT, and parallel (Centronics and
Dataproducts) cables.
■ Appendix C: Notices
Presents legal, safety, and other notices.
■ Appendix D: Additional Technical Information
Provides information on how your printer works, and on
customizing the printer’s memory allocation.
■ Glossary
Explains many of the terms used in the documentation.
Optional Documentation
The following optional manuals are available from your QMS
vendor:
■ QMS Crown Document Option Commands
This document lists and explains Document Option
Commands (DOCs). You insert these commands into
documents or separator files to enable job-specific printer
features (or special features that your application or page
description language can’t access). In most cases, only
advanced network users and system administrators need
this information.
■ QMS Crown Network Notes
These notes provide tips for getting the best performance
from your printer if it’s connected to a networkthrough the
parallel or serial port. In most cases, only advanced
network users and system administrators need this
information. This manual is contained on a disk. The
README file on the disk explains how to access the
manual.
1 - 4
I n t r o d u c t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
■ HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference
This document covers the HP PCL 5 emulation. In most
cases, only advanced PCL 5 users and system
administrators need this information.
■ QMS Crown Technical Reference
This document provides advanced technical information,
including information on communication protocols,
HP-GL emulation, HP PCL emulation, CCITT, and
PostScript emulation. In most cases, only advanced users
and system administrators need this information. This
manual is contained on a disk. The README file on the
disk explains how to access the manual.
Other Documentation
Other sources of information you may find helpful are
■ HP PCL 5C Technical Support Notes
These notes cover the HP PCL 5C color commands. They
are available free through CompuServe, the QMS bulletin
board, and Q-FAX. Appendix A, “QMS Customer
Support,” of this document explains how to use these
services.
■ Printer Option Documentation
If you purchased a printer option (for example, a direct
network interface card), you may have received separate
documentation for it. Check chapter 8, “Printer Options,”
of this manual for additional option information.
■ Electronic Information
CompuServe, the Internet, our bulletin board, and Q-FAX
are all sources of information from QMS. Appendix A,
I n t r o d u c t i o n
1 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
“QMS Customer Support,” of this manual explains how to
use these sources.
Don’t forget that the documentation for your application, operating
system,andnetworkprobablycontainsuseful printinginformation.
Typographic Conventions
Mixed-Case Text you type, and messages and information
Courier
displayed on the computer monitor
Mixed-Case Variable text you type; replace the italicized word(s)
Italic
Courier
with informationspecifictoyour printerorworkstation
UPPERCASE
COURIER
Information displayed in the printer message window
lowercase bold PostScript operators
lowercase italic Variable information in text and PostScript variables
UPPERCASE File and utility names
↵
Press the Enter key (PC) or Return key (Macintosh)
^X
Press and hold down the Ctrl key (PC) while you type
the following letter.
NOTE: Notes contain tips, extra information, or important
information that deserves emphasis or reiteration.
CAUTION: Cautions present information that you need to know
to avoid equipment damage or extreme annoyance.
WARNING!
Warnings indicate the possibility of personal in-
jury if a procedure is not performed exactly as described in the
manual.
1 - 6
I n t r o d u c t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
ACHTUNG!
Bitte halten Sie sich exakt an die im Handbuch
beschriebene Vorgehensweise, da sonst Verletzungsgefahr
bestehen könnte.
Printer Features
The following overview acquaints you with the printer’s major
features and their benefits. Consult the table of contents or index
(blue pages) of this manual to find more information on the
features.
Color Laser Technology
The magicolor LX laser printer features advanced color-laser
technology that allows it to produce inexpensive, durable, 300 or
600 dpi prints on plain paper or transparencies, at 3 to 6 color pages
and 12 monochrome pages per minute.
QCOLOR Technology
The magicolor LX laser printer features QCOLOR,
a
QMS-developed technology for automatically optimizing color
printing, for Windows and Macintosh applications. When enabled,
QCOLOR configures the magicolor LX for the best output quality
based on the contents of the document (for example, text, line art,
presentation graphics, photographs, or scans).
I n t r o d u c t i o n
1 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
The magicolor LX printer also supports device-independent color,
either directly or through a color management system, such as
Apple’s ColorSync and Pantone’s POCE. This printer also
supports the PANTONE®* MATCHING SYSTEM, the standard
model for color reproduction in graphic arts and publishing, to help
you see the most accurate PANTONE Color simulations for
proofing. Chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,” contains more
information on QMS Automatic Color Control and color
management systems.
Multiple Resolutions
If you purchased a printer with 12 MB RAM, you can print color
or monochrome documents in 300 dpi or monochrome documents
in 600 dpi. You can print color and monochrome documents in 600
dpi if you install additional RAM in the printer. The magicolor LX
ships with either12or 24 MB of RAM. See appendix B,“Technical
Specifications,” for specific information on RAM requirements
and color resolution.
Software Loadable System (SLS)
Your printer has a software loadable system, SLS, which allows
you to replace or upgrade its system software from a host. Future
enhancements to the system software can be easily installed as they
become available from QMS.
* Pantone, Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color and color reproduction materials.
1 - 8
I n t r o d u c t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Energy Saver Mode
The magicolor LX printer’s Energy Saver option allows it to
automatically enter a lower-power state after no print jobs have
been received for a certain length of time (which you define). The
Energy Star version of the magicolor LX printer (look for an
Energy Star labelontheback of
the printer) is compliant with
US Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) Energy Star
regulations. The EPA Energy
Star Computers program
promotes the use of
energy-efficient personal computers, monitors,andprintersandthe
reduction of air pollution caused by power generation. See
“Administration/Engine/Energy Saver ” in chapter 4, “Printer
Configuration,” for information on Energy Saver options.
NOTE: The addition of some optional interfaces, in some
combinations, may cause the product to become
non-Energy Star compliant.
QMS Crown Operating System
Your printer features the QMS Crown multitasking printer
operating system. Some of its features are
■ Multitasking
The printer receives, compiles, processes, and prints
simultaneously, so jobs are printed more quickly and the
host is free sooner.
■ Simultaneous Interface Operation
All interfaces are active at the same time, buffering and
processing data until pages can be printed, which increases
I n t r o d u c t i o n
1 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
throughput. (Each input buffer can be expanded with
optional memory.)
■ Emulation Sensing Processor Technology
When in ESP mode (selectable through PS Executive
Series Utilities or the control panel), the printer analyzes
incoming data and selects the appropriate printer language
from those available, so users don’t have to set switches or
send commands to use different printer emulations. ESP
mode works with most popular commercially available
applications.
■ Context Switching
After initial use, the state of an emulation and downloaded
data (fonts, macros, overlays) is preserved for as long as
the printer power is on, so repetitive downloading is
unnecessary.
■ Compile-ahead Processing
Pages are compiled into intermediate, compressed blocks
of data that can be immediately and more easily rasterized
or more efficiently stored for concurrent compiling,
rasterizing, and printing. This allows the printer to
maintain full print speed under maximum job activity.
■ User-configurable Input Buffers
Printer memory can be configured to enable the most
efficient spooling for a particular environment. Chapter 4,
“Printer Configuration,” contains more information on
printer memory.
■ Spooling Overflow
Data is spooled transparently to the internal hard disk, so
input buffers aren’t limited to RAM capacity.
■ Compressed Data Format
1 - 1 0
I n t r o d u c t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Data is compressed so that entire documents can be stored
in theprinter, allowingusersto take advantageofadvanced
document handling features such as jam recovery without
resending files.
Media Flexibility
With this printer, you can print on plain paper,laser paper,
transparencies, labels, envelopes, and thick stock in letter, A4,
executive, and legal sizes. Plain paper, economical and widely
available, is the ideal choice when adding spot color to reports,
newsletters, and other documents. Laser paper, such as
Hammermill’s Laser Print, allows the richest color output and most
consistent coverage (especially for large areas) for the highest
quality documents or prepress proofs. See chapter 5, “Print Media
and Daily Operations,” for detailed information on different media
types.
Automatic Jam Recovery
The printer has jam recovery, so that after a jam is removed, the
printer automatically reprints the jammed page(s) and finishes the
job.
Convenient Control Panel Operation
The keypad and message window on the control panel allow easy
access to the Configuration menu, through which you can change
printer defaults to suit your needs. The message window and the
LEDsindicateprinter status. Messagescan be displayedinEnglish,
French, Spanish, or German. An optional security card allows
access through the printer control panel to be password protected,
so that only users who know the password can change printer
configuration.
I n t r o d u c t i o n
1 - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
PS Executive Series Utilities
Once you install this software on your host, use its menus to access
printer features, such as printer naming and font and emulation
downloading. PS Exec also contains sample files that illustrate
some of your printer’s capabilities. The PS Exec software is
accompanied by Macintosh screen fonts and a PC screen printing
utility. You can also load new system software through PS Exec.
A README file explains how to install PS Executive Series
Utilities, and its online help explains how to use the utilities.
PostScript Level 2 Compatibility
The printer’s Level 2 emulation is fully compatible with Adobe’s
PostScript Level 2 page description language, whose features
include device-independent color, improved memory and resource
management, data compression/decompression filters, and pattern
and form caching. Full support (selectable through PS Executive
Series Utilities or the control panel) for PostScript Level 1 files is
also included in this printer.
Resident HP PCL 5C and HP-GL Emulation
Your printer emulates the HP PaintJet XL300 PCL 5C printer. This
emulation supports the complete set of color commands in the
XL300, 13 outline typefaces, and 7 PCL Courier and Lineprinter
bitmap fonts (see “The Resident HP PCL Fonts” in chapter 7,
“Optimizing Color Output,” for a font list). It also supports
HP-GL/2 vector graphics. This printer also emulates the following
HP-GL plotters: 7550A, 7470A, 7475A, and ColorPro.
Intel RISC-based Controller
A 33 MHz Intel 80960CF RISC microprocessor boosts processing
speed.
1 - 1 2
I n t r o d u c t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
39 Resident PostScript Fonts
Your printer comes with 39 licensed PostScript fonts. All these
fonts have multilingual character sets. See “The Resident
PostScript Fonts” in chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,” for a
list.
Printer Options
■ Full-color 600 dpi printing in all supported page sizes
If you upgrade to 28 MB RAM or more, you can print
four-color documents in all supported page sizes in 600
dpi. See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for
specific information on RAM requirements and color
resolution.
■ User-upgradable RAM (Random Access Memory)
The resident RAM is user-upgradable to as much as 64
MB, which allows your printer’s capacities to grow with
your needs. Additional RAM expands printing capabilities
and can improve system performance.
■ Font and Emulation Cards
Fonts and printer emulations are containedonsmall printer
circuit boards called cards, which can be plugged into slots
on the front of the printer. Contact your QMS vendor for
a complete list of available cards.
■ Direct Network Interface for Ethernet or Token-Ring
A direct network interface is available for DECnet,
EtherTalk, LAN Manager/LAN Server, Novell NetWare,
TCP/IP, and EtherTalk on Ethernet networks, as well as
LAN Manager/LAN Server, Novell NetWare, and TCP/IP
on Token-Ring networks.
■ Hard disk expandability
I n t r o d u c t i o n
1 - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Your printer comes standard with an upgradable 80 MB
internal hard disk. Also, through the resident 25-pin SCSI
connector port, the printer’s capabilities can be expanded
with up to six external hard disks. A hard disk provides
storage for a cache of character bitmaps, downloaded
outline fonts, and other files.
■ 250-sheet Optional Sheet Feeder
The cassette in the optional sheet feeder can hold up to 250
sheets, which allows you to spend less time refilling
cassettes and to use different types of media more
conveniently (for example, you could load transparencies
in the standard cassette and plain paper in the
sheet-feeder’s cassette.)
■ Envelope Cassette
You can purchase an envelope cassette from your QMS
vendor. This cassette holds up to 30 DL or Com 10
envelopes and fits in the standard or optional
media-cassette slot.
♦
1 - 1 4
I n t r o d u c t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Introduction
This chapter explains how to set up the printer for the first time.
For quick information on replacing print media, developer, and
toner after the initial setup, see chapters 5 and 6, “Print Media and
Daily Operations,” and “Consumables and Preventative
Maintenance.”
NOTE: We recommend that you have the printer set up by a
QMS-authorized technician. The instructions in this
chapter are provided for people experienced in working
with printers, but must be followed carefully to avoid
damage to the printer. QMS reserves the right to charge
for repairs necessitated by improper installation. See
appendix B, “QMS Customer Support,” for information
on contacting QMS.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Finding a Good Location for Your Printer
Location Requirements
Your printer should located
■ On a hard, level surface (maximum 1° slant) capable of
supporting the printer weight (approximately 106 lbs/48
kg).
■ Away from cooling sources, heating sources, extreme
temperature changes, direct sunlight, excessive dust, and
corrosive chemicals or vapors.
■ Away from any strong electromagnetic field (such as that
created by an air conditioner) and excessive vibration.
■ In an area with a moderate temperature (64° to 81° F; 18°
to 27° C).
■ In an area with a relative humidity of 60% to 70%.
■ An appropriate distance from the host: less than 6 feet (1.8
meters) for parallel communication, less than 25 feet (7.5
meters) for serial communication.
■ Near an electrical outlet.
2 - 2
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
■ With proper clearance and ventilation area: left side 36"
(90 cm), right side 4" (10 cm), front 28" (70 cm), rear 16"
(40 cm).
■ With enough space foryou toopentheprinter andtoaccess
the paper cassette(s). Figure 2.1 illustrates the proper
clearance for your printer.
Fig. 2.1 Printer Clearance
Power Requirements
Your printer requires a properly grounded (earth connection) 120
volt (±12 volts) outlet. The required frequency is 60 Hz (±2 Hz).
The electrical connection should be direct, not via a branched
socket, and should be surge-protected. Noise-generating
equipment shouldn’t be connected to the same electrical outlet as
the printer.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
What’s Included in the Shipment
In addition to this manual, your shipment should contain the
following items:
■ QMS magicolor LX printer
■ OPC belt cartridge
■ 4 developer cartridges (1 each yellow, magenta, cyan,
black)
■ 4 toner cartridges (1 each yellow, magenta, cyan, black)
■ Cleaning pad
■ Oil bottle
■ Waste toner pack
■ Power cord
■ PS Executive Series Utilities disks
■ Softload system back-up disks (includes printer system
software and PostScript fonts on DOS and Macintosh
disks, and PCL fonts on a DOS disk).
Interfacecablesaren’tincluded withtheprinter.ContactyourQMS
vendor if you need cables. See chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer,”
for information on cables, and appendix B, “Technical
Specifications,” for cable pinouts. If you find any part of the
shipment missing or damaged, contact the shipping company or
your QMS vendor immediately. Don’t return any merchandise to
the manufacturer without authorization.
2 - 4
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
QMS Product Registration
Register your QMS product now. In the US, call (800) 637-8049
to register. In other countries, see appendix A, “QMS Customer
Support,” for the appropriate number.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Unpacking the Printer
The packingmaterials thatprotecttheprinter duringshipment must
be removed. You might want to save the packing materials in case
you ever have to move or ship the printer.
CAUTION: You may damage the printer if you turn it on before
all packing materials are removed.
WARNING!
The printer weighs approximately 106 lbs(48 kg)
without consumables. Do not attempt to lift it by yourself.
ACHTUNG!
Der Drucker hatein Gewicht von ungefähr48kg.
Bitte versuchen Sie niemals, den Drucker alleine anzuheben
oder zu transportieren.
1. Remove everything except the printer from the shipping
carton (fig. 2.2).
2. With the assistance of another person, grasp the printer by the
four ridged finger grips (two on each side of the printer) and
lift it out of the carton and remove the plastic wrap (fig. 2.2).
2 - 6
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Fig. 2.2 Unpacking the Printer
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
3. Before you begin setup, take a few minutes to look over
figures 2.3 and 2.4. They provide a quick overview of the
exterior parts of your printer.
2 - 8
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Fig. 2.3 Front View of the Printer
Fig. 2.4 Back View of the Printer
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
4. Remove the two polystyrene inserts from the top cover of the
printer.
5. Remove all packing tape from the exterior of the printer.
6. Grasp the front end of the top cover and lift it up to remove it
(fig. 2.5). Then, set the cover aside for now.
Fig. 2.5 Remove the Top Cover (front view)
7. Remove the two polystyrene shipping spacers from inside the
printer.
2 - 1 0
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Installing Developer and Toner Cartridges
When you load developer and toner cartridges, the colors must be
in a set order from the back of the printer to the front. Black should
be loaded in the slot closest to the rear of the printer, followed by
cyan, then magenta, and finally yellow in the front slot.
BK
C
M
Y
Fig. 2.6 Cartridge Loading Order (front view)
WARNING!
The developer and toner are highly combustible
powders; never burn them. Also, avoid inhaling loose devel-
oper or toner or getting them around your eyes; they can cause
respiratory problems and eye irritation.
ACHTUNG!
Bei Entwickler und Toner handelt es sich um
gefährliche Pulver, die leicht entzündlich sind; sie dürfen
deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen.
Einatmen oder Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls
zu vermeiden, da dieses zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege,
Haut oder Augenreizungen führen könnte.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
CAUTION: The same color developer and toner cartridges must
always be loaded in the same place on the printer. To prevent
accidental mixing of colors, each toner cartridge has pins that are
keyedto fit only the developer cartridgeof the corresponding color.
Never force a toner cartridge onto the wrong developer cartridge.
This can damage the cartridges and the printer.
NOTE: A developer cartridge must be installed before the toner
cartridge of the same color.
1. Remove the developer cartridge from its protective bag,
starting with theblackcartridge.(The developer cartridgesare
color-coded on their tops.)
2 - 1 2
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
2. Grasp the two green latches, one at each end of the cartridge,
and raise them straight up (fig. 2.7) to open them.
3. Holding the developer cartridge by the green latches, gently
lower it into the open cartridge slot closest to the back end of
the printer until it seats firmly under the securing latches (fig.
2.7).
Fig. 2.7 Load Developer Cartridge (front view)
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
4. Close the green latches by pushing them forward and down to
hold the developer cartridge in place (fig. 2.8).
Fig. 2.8 Close Latches (rear view)
2 - 1 4
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
5. Grasp the tab on the top of the developer cartridge. Pull the
tab and attached clear tape straight up and out of the cartridge,
making sure the tape comes completely out (fig. 2.9). Then,
discard the tab and tape.
Fig. 2.9 Remove Sealing Tape (rear view)
6. Locate the toner cartridge that matches the color of the
developer cartridge just installed, and remove it from its
protective bag. (Toner cartridges are color-coded—black,
cyan, magenta, or yellow—on the top.)
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
7. Hold the toner cartridge as shown in figure 2.10, and shake it
horizontally. This distributes toner evenly inside the cartridge
and helps assure quality printing.
Fig. 2.10 Distribute Toner in Cartridge
2 - 1 6
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
8. Hold and squeeze the toner cartridge across the center (fig.
2.11), and align it with the developer cartridge of the same
color. Make sure the pins on the back side of the toner
cartridge line up with the notches on the developer cartridge.
CAUTION: Neverforcea tonercartridgeonto thewrongdeveloper
cartridge. Not only will this damage the cartridges, but also the
pressure can damage the printer.
9. Lower the toner cartridge until it fits firmly onto the notches
on the developer cartridge (fig. 2.11).
Fig. 2.11 Align Cartridges (rear view)
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
10. Press the top of the toner cartridge until the cartridge latches
securely in place.
11. Grasp the tab on the top of the toner cartridge.
12. Hold the toner cartridge in place with one hand as you pull the
tab and attached clear tape straight up and completely out of
the cartridge (fig. 2.12) using the other hand. Then discard the
tab and tape.
Fig. 2.12 Remove Sealing Tape (rear view)
13. Repeat steps 1-12 to load the cyan, then the magenta, and
finally the yellow developer and toner cartridges, making sure
each toner cartridge is loaded onto the corresponding
developer cartridge.
2 - 1 8
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
When you finish, the black cartridges should be in the last slot
toward the back of the printer, then the cyan in the next slot, the
magenta in the third slot coming forward, and the yellow in the
front slot.
After the toner and developer are installed, you need to remove the
pressure-release pieces.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Removing the Pressure-Release Pieces
Twopressure-release pieceshelprelievetensiononthefuserrollers
to protect the rollers from accidental damage during shipment.
These pieces must be removed before printing. Use the following
procedure to remove these pieces:
1. With the top cover still off, pull up on the paper exit unit latch
and then tilt the unit back and down to open it (fig. 2.13).
Fig. 2.13 Open the Paper Exit Unit (rear view)
2. Pull back the two latches (one on each side) of the separator
pawl unit to unlock it. Then, tilt the pawl unit back in the
direction of paper exit unit atthe backof the printer (fig. 2.14).
2 - 2 0
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Fig. 2.14 Open Separator Pawl Unit (front view)
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
3. Open the pressure-release lever on the end of the fuser unit
(fig. 2.15).
Fig. 2.15 Open the Lever (rear view)
2 - 2 2
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
4. Grasp the tab end of one of the green pressure-release pieces
and gently pull it up and out of the printer (fig. 2.16). Remove
thepieceattheotherendofthefuserroller inthesamemanner.
Fig. 2.16 Remove Both Pieces (front view)
5. Store the two pressure-release pieces in a safe place.
NOTE: You need to reinstall both pieces if you move the
printer farther than just across a table or from one side of a
room to another—especially if the printer may not remain
level or may be jostled. See “Moving your Printer” in chapter
6 for details on replacing these pieces. Also, reinstall both
pieces if the printer will not be used for 2 weeks or more.
6. Close the pressure-release lever on the end of the fuser unit.
Once the pressure-release pieces are removed, you need to install
the cleaning pad and oil bottle.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Installing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle
The cleaning pad removes printing debris (such as excess toner and
paper dust) from the fusing unit. The oil keeps toner from sticking
to the fuser rollers. Instructions for installing the cleaning pad and
oil bottle are given in this section. Replacing the cleaning pad and
oil bottle are covered in chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative
Maintenance.”
To install the cleaning pad and oil bottle
1. Remove the cleaning pad and oil bottle from their protective
bags.
2 - 2 4
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
2. Holding the cleaning pad by its center tab, align the center of
the tab with the triangle mark on the printer (tab-side away
from the triangle) (fig. 2.17).
3. Slide the pad into the slot above the heat roller (fig. 2.17). The
pad is correctly positioned when it is centered snugly in the
slot.
Fig. 2.17 Install the Cleaning Pad (front view)
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
4. Snap the separator pawl unit closed (fig. 2.18).
Fig. 2.18 Close Separator Pawl Unit (front view)
2 - 2 6
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
5. Pull open the spring latch on the outer edge of the oil bottle
retainer, and lift the retainer up and toward the center of the
printer (fig. 2.19).
NOTE: The spout of the oil bottle has a seal to prevent oil
from spilling until the bottle is installed on the pin in the fuser
slot.
6. Hold the bottle, spout end down with the label facing the
printer’s front, over the slot in the top of the fuser unit (fig.
2.19).
7. Lower the bottle into place, making sure the spout on the
bottom of the bottle aligns with the pin in the fuser slot. The
bottle is positioned correctly when it fits snugly in the slot and
is flush with the top of the fuser unit.
Fig. 2.19 Install the Oil Bottle (rear view)
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
8. Close the oil bottle retainer, making sure the latch snaps back
in place.
9. Close the paper exit unit (fig. 2.20).
Fig. 2.20 Close the Paper Exit Unit (rear view)
2 - 2 8
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
10. Replace the top cover (fig. 2.21).
Fig. 2.21 Replace the Top Cover (front view)
Now install the waste toner pack. The next section covers this
process.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Installing the Waste Toner Pack
NOTE: For information on replacing a used waste toner pack, see
chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative
Maintenance.”
To install the waste toner pack
1. Remove the waste toner pack from its protective bag.
2. Follow the instructions accompanying the pack for
assembling it, being careful not to puncture the bag.
3. Open the waste toner door by pushing the cover on the
top-right corner (fig. 2.22).
Fig. 2.22 Open the Waste Toner Door (side view)
2 - 3 0
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
4. Holding the waste toner pack by the side tab, insert the pack
into the printer until it fits securely (fig. 2.23). Then, lift up
slightly on the tab to be sure the pack is level and centered.
Fig. 2.23 Insert the Waste Toner Pack in the Printer
5. Close the waste toner door.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Installing the OPC Belt Cartridge
This section covers installing the OPC (Organic Photoconductor)
belt cartridge into your printer. See “How Your Printer Works” in
appendix D for details on the role the OPC belt plays in printing.
Replacing the cartridge is covered in chapter 6, “Consumables and
Preventative Maintenance.”
To install the OPC cartridge
1. Open the manual feed tray (fig. 2.24) by pushing the top-right
corner to release the spring latch.
Fig. 2.24 Open the Manual Feed Tray
2 - 3 2
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
CAUTION: The OPC belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights
and direct sunlight. Do not remove the cartridge from its protective
bag until you are ready to install it. Limit exposure to light of 800
lux (the average fluorescent lighting in an office) to under 2
minutes. If exposure exceeds this, put the belt into a dark place,
like inside the printer, to recover; depending on exposure, recovery
may take up to 2 hours.
Also, handle the belt cartridge carefully. The belt is extremely
sensitive to hand oils and scratches, both of which will reduce print
quality.
2. Remove the OPC belt cartridge from its protective bag.
NOTE: Besuretosavethe protective bagto useduringprinter
cleaning and maintenance when the OPC belt cartridge is out
of the printer.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
3. Remove the pressure release and tension release pin sets (one
set on the left and one on theright)fromtheOPC beltcartridge
(fig. 2.25).
NOTE: The pressure release and tension release pins protect
the belt and its cleaning blade by relieving tension during
shipment. Save these pins to reinstall them if you need to ship
the printer later.
Fig. 2.25 Remove the Release Pins
2 - 3 4
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
4. Make sure the green handle on the end of the OPC belt
cartridge is turned up (unlocked).
5. Slide the cartridge three-quarters of the way into the printer
until the notches on each side of the bottom rest on the lip of
the manual feed tray (fig. 2.26).
Fig. 2.26 Slide Cartridge Partially into Printer
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
6. Remove the black light-shield paper from the OPC belt by
pulling the tab on the front as shown in figure 2.27 and pulling
the paper straight out of the printer.
NOTE: If the light-shield paper doesn’t slide out easily or if
it should begin to tear, pull the OPC belt cartridge a little
farther out of the printer and try again.
Fig. 2.27 Remove the Light-Shield Paper
2 - 3 6
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
7. Firmly slide the cartridge the rest of the way into the printer
until it snaps into place. It is in place when you can see the
green arrows inside the metal frame of the printer.
8. Turn the green end-handle on the cartridge down to close it
and lock the cartridge in place.
9. Close the manual feed tray (fig. 2.28).
Fig. 2.28 Close the Manual Feed Tray
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Filling the Paper Cassette
Instructions are given here for loading and printing on letter- or
A4-size paper. Chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily Operations,” has
instructions for refilling the cassette, for printing on other media
types and sizes, and for inserting media manually. Chapter 5 also
contains information about margins and imageable areas.
1. Pull the paper cassette out of the printer (fig. 2.29).
Fig. 2.29 Remove the Paper Cassette
2 - 3 8
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
2. Make sure the size key slide on the back end of the cassette is
set for letter- or A4-size media (fig. 2.30).
NOTE: The printer comes from thefactory configured to print
on letter- or A4-size media. If you want to print on a different
size media, see “Refilling the Media Cassette” in chapter 5 for
information. Also, see chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for
information on setting size through the control panel.
EX LT A4 LG
Fig. 2.30 Check the Cassette Size Key Slide
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
3. Fromthe paper wrapping, determine which is the printing side
of the paper (an arrow points in the direction of the printing
side on most wrappers). Then remove a stack of paper
approximately 1"/27 mm (250 sheets) or less.
NOTE: Make sure the paper is in good condition, free of such
things as folds, tears, or wrinkles.
4. Fan the paper (fig. 2.31) to prevent the sheets from sticking
together. Align the edges of the stack on a flat surface.
Fig. 2.31 Fan the Paper
2 - 4 0
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
5. Load the paper printing-side up in the cassette, top end first
for letterhead or preprinted media. (Printing onthe wrong side
may reduce print quality.) Make sure the paper lies flat and
does not exceed the upper-limit mark on the cassette for foil
(transparencies) or paper (fig. 2.32). Overloading the cassette
can cause a jam.
Paper
Foil
Fig. 2.32 Load the Paper
6. Adjust the paper guides on each side and on the trailing edge
of the media so that they rest lightly against the media without
causing it to buckle.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
7. Slide the filled cassette into the printer (fig. 2.33) until it snaps
firmly into place and is flush with the front of the printer.
Fig. 2.33 Slide the Cassette into the Printer
2 - 4 2
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Starting the Printer
After you have unpacked the printer and installed the consumables,
you need to connect the power cord and turn on the two power
switches.
Connecting the Power Cord
The power connector is on the back of the printer on the lower-left
side.
CAUTION: Make sure that the main power switch on the back of
the printer is off (the O is pressed down). Make sure the remote
power switch on the front is off (the button is out).
1. Connect one end of the power cord to the rear of the printer
(fig. 2.34).
Fig. 2.34 Connect the Power Cord
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
2. Connect the opposite end of the power cord to a grounded,
surge-protected, electrical outlet.
Using the Power Switches
There are two power switches on your printer, a main switch on
the rear and a remote switch (for convenience) on the front. Only
one switch has to be off to turn off the printer; however, both
switches must be on to turn on the printer. Turn on the back switch
by setting it to the on (|) position. Turn on the front switch by
pressing it in.
CAUTION: If the printer won’t be used for several days (such as
over a weekend), or if any maintenance work is done, make sure
at least one of the power switches is off. This reduces wear and
extends the life of the fuser.
When first turned on, the printer goes through an initialization
warm-up and self-testing period of approximately 4 minutes. Close
to the end of this process, the printer produces a start-up page (see
the next section for information on the start-up page). When
warm-up is complete, IDLEdisplays in the message window.
NOTE: If the start-up page does not print, see chapter 9,
“Troubleshooting.” Make sure you wait long enough for
the initialization process to finish.
The Start-up Page
When you initially turn on your printer, a start-up page prints in
approximately 4 minutes. This page gives basic information about
the printer, such as the printer’s name, the PostScript emulation
level and version, and various printer settings. For a detailed list of
2 - 4 4
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
what the start-up page includes, see “The Start-Up Page” in chapter
5.
If thestart-up pageprints,andtheprintquality is good,gotochapter
3, “Connecting the Printer.”
Otherwise, see chapter 9, “Troubleshooting,” for more
information, and be aware of the following warning.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn the printer off (both switches),
and then unplug it before checking your installation.
ACHTUNG!
Bitte schalten Sie unbedingt den Drucker aus
und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die korrekte
Installation des Druckers überprüfen.
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
2 - 4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Installing Options
If you purchased any printer options, such as extra memory or
emulations, install these now. If installation instructions are
included with the option, follow those, and be sure to check for
additional instructions in chapter 8, “Printer Options.” Then return
to chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer,” to finish setting up your
printer.
♦
2 - 4 6
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Introduction
This chapter explains how to connect your printer to a host
computer after you have set it up according to the instructions in
the previous chapter, “Initial Printer Setup.”
Connecting to a Network
If you’ve purchased a network interface for your printer, see
chapter 8, “Printer Options,” for installation information, and see
your network and your interface kit documentation for further
details.
About Macintosh Networks
If you’re connecting to a print network such as TOPS or
AppleShare using LocalTalk-type connectors and boxes, see your
Macintosh and network documentation for details specific to your
setup.
All Macintosh users on a network must use the same version of
LaserWriter to run correctly. For example, if the network has a
mixture of LaserWriter 7.0 and 8.x, it will experience frequent
reinitialization problems. Also, to get color output, you must use
LaserWriter and Laser Prep 6.0 or higher. (System 6 users must
also all have the same version of Laser Prep unless they’re using
LaserWriter 6.1 or higher.) Check the version number by selecting
the LaserWriter icon, then holding down the Command key while
pressing the letter I. The driver version number appears in the Info
window.
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Connecting to a Macintosh
What You Need
To connect your printer to a single Macintosh, you need the items
shown in the illustration below:
■ Two PhoneNET-type transformer boxes
You need one with a DIN-8 connector for the printer port
and one with the connector required by your Macintosh
(usually a DIN-8).
■ RJ11 (telephone) cable
■ Terminating resistors—probably two
If you’re replacing a printer already connected to a Macintosh, you
probably already have this equipment.
Fig. 3.1 Macintosh-Printer Interface Cables and Port
3 - 2
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
NOTE: If you’re connecting more than one Macintosh to the
printer, in an AppleTalk network, see your PhoneNET
and Macintosh documentation for information.
Making the Connection
CAUTION: Turn off both the printer and the Macintosh before
making the connection.
1. Plug the connector from one transformer box into the printer’s
LocalTalk port.
2. Plug the connector from the other transformer box into the
Macintosh.
3. Connect the two transformer boxes with the telephone cable.
4. Put terminating resistors into any open sockets in the
transformer boxes. This ensures proper communication
betweenthe Macintosh and the printer and helpsspeedupdata
transmission.
5. Turn on the printer.
Printing from the Macintosh
If your Macintosh waspreviously connected to a PostScript printer,
you can probably start printing now. See your application
documentation for instructions on sending a document to the
printer or see “Testing Macintosh Communication,” later in this
chapter.
However, to take advantage of all your printer’s special features
(like QCOLOR automatic color control technology, and media size
and type selection), or if you’ve never printed to a PostScript
printer before, you need to take a few minutes to load the following
software from the Macintosh disks we shipped with your printer:
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
■ PS Executive Series printer utilities
PS Exec is a utilities software package for controlling the
printer from the Macintosh. For example, through PS Exec
you can turn off the start-up page, install printer-resident
screen fonts, rename the printer, download fonts, manage
hard disks, and print font samples. Many of the procedures
described in this manual involve using PS Exec.
■ LaserWriter 8.x and the magicolor LX 4.1 PPD file
Although your Macintosh system software came with a
LaserWriter driver, we recommend you install
LaserWriter 8.x and the magicolor LX PPD (a printer
description file) so you can take advantage of special
printer features (like QCOLOR automatic color control
technology, and media size and type selection).
■ Application-specific printer files
If you plan to print from Aldus PageMaker, Aldus
FreeHand, Aldus PrePrint, Adobe Separator, or
QuarkXPress, you’ll also want to install the latest printer
description file (PPD, PDX, or PDF) for your particular
software. (You can probably print without them, but you
may not be able to access all your printer’s features, and
you may get an error message telling you to change the
printer name.)
Installing the Printer Utilities
1. InserttheMacintosh FormatPSExecutiveSeriesUtilitiesdisk
in your Macintosh.
2. Double-click the PSExec3.xx.sea file.
3. In the window that appears, choose Continue.
4. In the window that appears, specify a folder to install the
utilities to and choose Save.
3 - 4
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
5. After all the files are extracted, choose Quit.
6. Open the Utilities folder in the PSExec 3.xx Folder and
double-click PSInstall to personalize the program.
7. Double-click the PSExec icon to run the program.
Check the README file for updates, and see the PS Exec
Help for information on using the program.
Installing LaserWriter 8.x and the magicolor LX 4.1
PPD
1. If you haven’t already, follow the instructions given above in
“Installing the Printer Utilities.”
2. Make backup copies of your current LaserWriter drivers and
the contents of your Printer Descriptions folder. (If you use
System 7, these files are stored in the Extensions folder in
your System Folder. IfyouuseSystem 6, these filesare stored
in the System Folder.)
3. Delete your LaserWriter 8 preferences files. (If you use
System 7, this file is stored in the Preferences folder in your
System Folder. If you use System 6, this file is stored in the
System Folder.)
4. Open the PSExec 3.xx Folder, then the Drivers folder, then
the LaserWriter folder to display the LaserWriter 8.x icon
(among other things).
5. Drag the LaserWriter 8.x icon to your current System Folder.
(The system knows where to copy it. If you’re prompted for
permission to copy the file to the folder, choose OK.)
6. System 7 users: Create a folder called Printer Descriptions
inside the Extensions folder inside the System Folder, if one
doesn’t already exist.
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
System 6 users: Create a folder called Printer Descriptions
inside the System Folder, if one doesn’t already exist.
7. Open the PPDs folder inside the Drivers folder in the PSExec
3.xx Folder.
8. Open the Ver 4.1 folder inside the PPDs folder.
9. Select the magicolor LX PPD in the Ver 4.1 folder and drag
it to the Printer Descriptions folder you created in step 4.
10. From the Apple menu, choose Chooser.
11. In the Chooser window, select the LaserWriter 8.x icon and
select the QMS magicolor LX.
12. Choose the Setup button.
This causes the LaserWriter to query the printer and
automatically choose the appropriate PPD.
13. Exit the Chooser.
Now, when you gointo your application, you canaccessQMS
printing options (like QCOLOR color control) by choosing
Options in your application’s Print dialog box. For
information on the printer-specific features in the Options
dialog box, see chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output.”
Note for Users of Aldus Applications
If you use an Aldus application, when you want to print, hold
down the Option key while selecting Print from the File menu.
This brings up the LaserWriter window, which contains the
QMS printing options like QCOLOR color control. (Normally,
Aldus applications bypass LaserWriter and use an Aldus
printer driver, which would prevent you from accessing QMS
color printing options.)
3 - 6
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Note for Adobe Photoshop Users
If you use Adobe PhotoShop, go to PhotoShop’s Page Setup
dialog box, and select Use Printer’s Default Screen under the
Screens option. (This allows your choices in the QMS driver
to take effect.)
Installing Printer Description Files
If you plan to print from Adobe Separator, Aldus PageMaker,
Aldus FreeHand, Aldus PrePrint, or QuarkXPress, install the
appropriate printer description file (PPD, PDX, and/or PDF) as
described below:
NOTE: The application should be installed before you install the
printer description file(s).
1. If you haven’t already, follow the instructions given above in
“Installing the Printer Utilities.”
2. Install the appropriate printer description file(s) for your
application from the Drivers folder in the PS Exec folder:
If you use Adobe Separator, install the PPD file. Your Separator
documentation explains where to put it.
If you use Aldus PageMaker 5.x, install the version 4.1 PPD in
the Printer Descriptions folder.
If you use Aldus PageMaker 4.x, install the version 3.0 PPD and
PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the System
Folder.
If you use Aldus FreeHand 4.x, install the version 4.1 PPD in the
Printer Descriptions folder.
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
If you use Aldus FreeHand 3.x, install the version 3.0 PPD and
PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the System
Folder.
If you use Aldus PrePrint, install the version 3.0 PPD and PDX
files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the System Folder.
If you use QuarkXPress, install the magicolor LX PDF in the
samefolder asQuarkXPress.QuarkXPress3.3allowsyouto access
either a PDF or a PPD, but in order to have access to all of your
printer’s features, we recommend that you use the PDF. To select
the PDF, go to Quark’s Page Setup dialog box and hold down the
Shift key while clicking the Printer Type listbox. (The selections
that appear italicized are PPDs and the selections that appear
non-italicized are PDFs.) Also in the Page Setup dialog box, make
sure the EFIColor profile selection is “None.”
Note that the Quark LPI setting you choose determines which
printer halftone settings are used. The table below shows which
printer halftone setting is used for each Quark LPI setting:
LPI
Halftone
15 to 44
45 to 54
55 to 79
80 to 89
90 to 99
100 to 125
126 and higher
Printer default
53 lpi x 45 degrees
71 lpi x 45 degrees
80 lpi x 45 degrees
Enhanced
106 lpi x 45 degrees
Printer default
Testing Macintosh Communication
You can test communication between the printer selected in the
Chooser and the Macintosh by sending a file to the printer from an
application (see your application documentation for more
information), or by printing a directory, as described here:
3 - 8
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
1. Display a disk or folder window.
2. From the File menu, choose Page Setup. Select paper size,
printing orientation, and any other necessary options. Then
select OK.
3. From the File menu, choose Print Directory or Print Window.
A dialog box appears.
4. Select the printing options you want, then click Print or OK.
(Choose the Save button to save your settings for future print
jobs.) A directory prints. (If no page prints, check chapter 9,
“Troubleshooting.”)
Where to Go Now
You’re now ready to print from your Macintosh.
From this point, you’ll probably perform most printing tasks from
your application. For specific information, check the printing
section in your application documentation.
For information on printmedia typesandsizes,see chapter 5, “Print
Media and Daily Operations.” For information about using your
printer’s color-printing features, see chapter 7 of this manual,
“Optimizing Color Output.”
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Connecting to a PC
If you have a brand-new computer, before connecting the printer,
you should followthemanufacturer’s instructionsfor setting up the
computer, including (if it’s not already installed) any operating
system software, such as DOS and Windows.
What You Need
To connect your printer to a single PC, you need one of the
following interface cables (not included with your printer, but
available at any computer store):
■ a parallel cable (with 36-pin and 25-pin male connectors)
■ or a serial cable (with a 25-pin male and a 9- or 25-pin
female connector, depending on the computer’s serial
port)
If you’re replacing a printer, you probably already have the
necessary cables.
How to Choose a Cable
We recommend using a parallel cable if possible, because parallel
communication doesn’t require printer configuration, while serial
communication often does. However, if the printer is more than 6
feet (1.8 meters) from the computer, we recommend using a serial
cable for better communication.
NOTE: Interface cables should be no longer than 6 feet (1.8
meters) for parallel or 25 feet (7.6 meters) for serial
communication.
3 - 1 0
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Making the Connection
CAUTION: If you’re connecting the printer to a single computer,
turn off both systems first.
1. At back of the printer, attach one end of the cable to the
appropriate port.
Parallel users: Connect the 36-pin end of the cable to the
printer port labeled “parallel,” and close the clips.
Fig. 3.2 Parallel Ports
Serial users: Connect the male end of the cable to the printer
port labeled “serial,” and tighten the screws.
Fig. 3.3 Serial Ports
NOTE: The port covered with a metal bracket is the SCSI port,
which is used for connecting external hard disks.
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
2. At the computer, attach the other end of the cable to
appropriate port. (The parallel port is female, and the serial
port is male.)
3. Turn on the printer and the computer.
4. Test communication.
Parallel users: You can do this by sending a file from one of
your applications or you can see “Testing Parallel
Communication,” later in this chapter.
Serial users: You can do this by sending a file from one of
your applications or you can see “Testing Serial
Communication,” later in this chapter.
5. See “PC Printing Software,” below to finish connecting the
printer.
PC Printing Software
If you’rereplacing acolor PostScript printer, youcanprobably start
printing now with the printing software already in place. You can
refer to your application documentation for instructions on sending
documents to the printer.
However, if you want to be able to use all your printer’s special
features (like QCOLOR automatic color control technology, media
size and type selection, and collation), or if you’ve never printed
to a color PostScript printer before, we recommend you take a few
minutes to make sure you have the following printing software
installed:
■ PS Executive Series Utilities
■ A color PostScript printer driver
3 - 1 2
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
■ Printer description files (if you use QuarkXPress 3.3,
Aldus PageMaker, or Adobe PhotoShop)
PS Executive Series Printer Utility Software
PS Exec, included on the DOS disks we shipped with your printer,
is a utility for controlling the printer from the computer. For
example, through PS Exec you can turn off the start-up page,
rename the printer, download fonts, manage hard disks, print font
samples, or print a file containing four-color simulations of
Pantone-identified colors and the percentage of the process colors
used to create them. Many of the procedures described in this
manual involve using PS Exec. The README file on the PS
Executive disk explains how to install the program, and the on-line
help explains how to use it.
Installing a Color PostScript Printer Driver
If you’re using Windows, we recommend that you install the
QMS-developed Windows driver. See “Installing the Windows3.1
Driver,” below.
If you’re using a non-Windows application, read the printing
section of the application documentation for information on
choosing a color PostScript driver. If the application does not
provide a color PostScript driver, contact the application
manufacturer to see if one has become available since you bought
the program. Also, color PostScript drivers for some applications
are available through the QMS Corporate Bulletin Board System
and through CompuServe; see appendix A, “QMS Customer
Support,” for information.
Also, check to see if application notes (tips for printing from
specific applications) are available for your application from
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Q-FAX, the QMS bulletin board, or CompuServe. Appendix A,
“QMS Customer Support,” explains how to use these QMS
information services.
Installing the Windows 3.1 Driver
NOTE: The QMS-developed Windows driver supports all the
printer’s advanced capabilities. However, if you
experience printing problems while using our driver with
a particular application, or if your application (like Aldus
PageMaker) requires the use of the Microsoft PostScript
driver, then we recommend using the Microsoft driver
along with the QMS WPD file, to add printer-specific
capabilities to the driver. (In this case, the QMS driver
for Windows can remain loaded in order to be used for
other applications.) The QMS WPD file is on the
Windows Drivers disk, shipped with the printer. See the
README file on the disk for information on using the
WPD.
Install the QMS driver for Windows (QSCRIPT.DRV) using the
following procedure:
1. Turn on your computer, start Windows, and insert the QMS
“Windows Driver” disk (shipped with your printer) into the
computer’s 3.5" floppy drive.
2. In Windows, open File Manager and display the contents of
the QMS Windows Driver disk.
Double-click the File Manager icon (usually located in
Program Manager’s Main window) and double-click the
appropriate disk-drive icon (the drive the Windows disk is in)
at the top of the File Manager window.
3 - 1 4
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
3. Drag the QSCRIPT.HLP file from the QMS disk to the
WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory.
4. Open the Windows Control Panel and double-click the
Printers icon.
The Control Panel icon is usually located in Program
Manager’s Main window.
5. In the Printers dialog box, choose the Add button.
6. From the List of Printers that appears, choose Install Unlisted
or Updated Printer and choose the Install button.
7. In the text box that appears, type the name of the floppy drive
(for example, A:\) the Windows disk is in and choose OK.
8. In the Add Unlisted or Updated Printer dialog box, select
“QMS PostScript Printer” and choose OK.
If you see the following message: "Insert Microsoft Windows
3.1 Disk #5 or a disk with the updated SSERIFF.FON file
in...," choose the Cancel button.
9. Choose the Connect button to configure your printer port.
10. In the Connect dialog box, select the appropriate host port in
the Ports list and choose OK.
11. Choose the Setup button, and in the Printers section of the
dialog box that appears, choose your printer (magicolor LX).
12. Choose OK to return to the Printers dialog box.
13. Choose Set As Default Printer to make the QMS printer the
default printer.
14. Repeat steps 5 through 12 to install the QMS driver for other
ports or choose Close to exit the Printers dialog box.
Now you can set printer options from your application by choosing
Print Setup from the application’s File menu and then choosing the
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Options button. Choose the Help button in any of the driver dialog
boxes for information on driver options.
Printer Description Files (PC)
Printer description files for Windows applications are included on
the Windows Drivers disk shipped with your printer:
If you use QuarkXPress 3.3, after you install the QMS driver for
Windows, install the magicolor LX PDF according to the
instructions in your QuarkXPress documentation for installing
PDFs. The table below shows which printer halftone setting will
be in effect for the Quark LPI setting chosen:
LPI
Halftone
15 to 44
45 to 54
55 to 79
80 to 89
90 to 99
100 to 125
126 and higher
Printer default
53 lpi x 45 degrees
71 lpi x 45 degrees
80 lpi x 45 degrees
Enhanced
106 lpi x 45 degrees
Printer default
If you use PageMaker 5.x, use the version 4 PPD on our Windows
Drivers disk. Also, Aldus requires that the Microsoft PostScript
driver (version 3.56 or later) be used with PageMaker. See your
PageMaker documentation for installation instructions. To be able
to access magicolor LX features from the Microsoft driver, add the
QMS WPD file (also on our Windows Drivers disk) to the
Microsoft driver. See the README file on our Windows Drivers
disk for information on adding our WPD. Note that the QMS driver
for Windows can be loaded to be used for applications besides
PageMaker.
3 - 1 6
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
If you use Adobe Photoshop, for best output quality use the
QMS-supplied Windows driver. Then, so that choices in the QMS
driver take effect, go to PhotoShop’s Page Setup dialog box, and
select Use Printer’s Default Screen under the Screens option.
Testing Parallel Communication
1. Go to the DOS C:\ prompt.
2. Create a short PostScript test file called PRINTEST.PS by
typing the following commands:
copy con printest.ps↵
showpage↵
^D^Z↵
To type ^Dand ^Z, press and hold down the Ctrl key while
you type the letters d and z. These are end-of-file characters.
You must type showpage, which is a PostScript command
telling the printer to eject a page, in lowercase letters. The ↵
symbol means press the Enter key, as it does throughout our
documentation.
3. At the DOS C:\ prompt, send PRINTEST.PS to the printer by
typing the following command:
print printest.ps↵
If prompted for the name of the list device, type the name of
the parallel port the printer is connected to, for example,
lpt1↵
NOTE: If the computer has more than one parallel port, they’re
probably labeled. If not, check the computer
documentation for the LPT port names.
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
If the printerandcomputerarecommunicating, ablankpageshould
eject from the printer. You are ready to start printing.
If a blank page does not ejectand you typedthefilecorrectly, check
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file to see if LPT1 (the parallel port) is
being directed to COM1 (the serial port). If the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file contains the following line, delete it:
MODE LPT1:=COM1:
Then type
mode lpt1:,,p
in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file so that print jobs are sent until the
printer accepts them. Reboot and try the communication test again.
See chapter 9, “Troubleshooting,” and refer to your DOS
documentation for more information.
3 - 1 8
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Testing Serial Communication
1. Go to the DOS C:\ prompt.
2. Create a short PostScript test file called PRINTEST.PS by
typing the following commands:
copy con printest.ps↵
showpage↵
^D^Z↵
To type ^Dand ^Z, press and hold down the Ctrl key while
you type the letters d and z. These are end-of-file characters.
You must type showpage, which is a PostScript command
telling the printer to eject a page, in lowercase letters. The ↵
symbol means press the Enter key, as it does throughout our
documentation.
3. At the DOS C:\ prompt, send PRINTEST.PS to the printer by
typing the following command:
print printest.ps↵
If prompted for the name of the list device, type the name of
the serial port you’re using at the computer, for example,
com1↵
NOTE: If the computer has more than one serial port, they’re
probably labeled. If not, check the computer
documentation for the COM port names.
If a blank page ejects from the printer, the printer and the
computer are communicating. You are ready to start printing.
If a blank page does not eject and you typed the file correctly,
make sure the printer’s serial port settings match those of the
PC. See “Checking Serial Communication Settings,” below.
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Checking Serial Communication Settings
If the serialcommunication testdescribedabovedoesn’twork,then
make sure your printer’s serial port settings (baud rate, parity, data
bits, and stop bits) match those of the PC.
To find out what the PC’s serial settings are, look in your
AUTOEXEC.BAT file (in the root directory) for a command line
like this:
MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1,P
In this example, the PC’s serial port communication settings are
9600 for baud rate, n (no) parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bits. The p
stands for infinite retry.
To find out what the printer’s serial settings are, check the printer’s
start-up page, which printed out when you first turned it on. It lists
the printer’s current serial port settings. To change them to match
the PC serial settings, use the printer control panel as described
below:
1. Press the printer control panel Online/Offline key to make the
Online LED go out.
2. Press the Menu key to enter the top-level menu, then press the
Next key until the message window displays
OPERATOR CONTROL
ADMINISTRATION
3. Press the Select key to enter the Administration menu, then
press the Next key until the message window displays
ADMINISTRATION
COMMUNICATIONS
4. Press the Select key to enter the Communications menu, then
press the Next key until the message window displays
3 - 2 0
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL
5. Press the Select key to enter the Serial menu, then press the
Next key until the message window displays
SERIAL
BAUD RATE
6. Press the SelectkeytoentertheBaudRatemenu.Themessage
windowdisplays the currentlyselected baud rate (*represents
a default setting):
*9600 BAUD
7. Press the Next key until the correct baud rate is displayed.
NOTE: Baud rates of 19200 and 38400 require that either RTS
or CTS hardware flow control (Hdwe Flow Ctl) be
selected. These baud rates do not support XON/XOFF
software flow control (Rcv Sw Flow CTL).
8. Press the Select key. The message window momentarily
displays
RATE
IS SELECTED
(where RATEis the baud rate you selected) and then
SERIAL
BAUD RATE
9. If you want to change other settings, use the Next key to scroll
to the setting you want to change, then repeat the procedure
described in steps 6 through 8 for finding and selecting new
settings.
When you have finished making changes, press the
Online/Offline key. The message window displays
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
SAVE CHANGES?
NO
To save your changes, press the Next key so that the message
window displays
SAVE CHANGES?
YES
Press the Select key to save the changes.
10. Press the Online key. The Online LED lights, and the
keyboard message window displays IDLE.
11. To verify the changes you just made, print a start-up page by
turning the printer off, then back on. Compare the serial port
settings listed on the page to those in your AUTOEXEC.BAT
file.
12. Try the communication test again. If a blank page ejects from
the printer, the printer and the computer are communicating.
You are ready to start printing.
If a blank page does not eject and you typed the file correctly, see
chapter 9, “Troubleshooting,” and refer to your DOS
documentation for more information.
About the Printer’s Communication Modes
The following sections explain the communication mode choices
you have with your printer, including the resident emulations,
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO), and Emulation Sensing
Processor (ESP) technology. All of these features enhance the
printer-computer interface.
3 - 2 2
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO)
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO), a standard feature of
Crown technology, enables your printer to communicate
simultaneously with hosts through the LocalTalk, parallel, serial,
and optional network interface ports. In other words, SIO allows
you to have more than one host communicating with the printer at
one time.
Emulation Sensing Processing (ESP) Modes
Youcaneither allowyour printer to operate in itsdefault ESP mode
or configure its ports to accept jobs in only a particular emulation
(for example, PostScript only, HP PCL 5 only, or HP-GL only.)
Thedefaultprintercommunication settings canbechangedthrough
the Configuration menu, which you access through the control
panel: In the Administration/Communications menu, you can
choose a default emulation for the parallel and serial interfaces, and
in the Administration/Emulations menu, you can configure the
printer defaults for each emulation mode. (The LocalTalk interface
uses only PostScript.)
Advanced users can also use PostScript operators to reconfigure
printer ports. The QMS Crown Technical Reference (an optional
manual available from your QMS vendor) contains information
about PostScript operators.
If you plan to send jobs in a mixture of emulations, you should
configure the parallel and serial ports for ESP mode. This mode is
a standard feature of Crown architecture. It works with most
popular commercially available applications, using a form of
artificial intelligence to analyze incoming file data and select the
appropriate printer emulation from those installed on the printer.
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
3 - 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
If you configure an interface port for ESP mode, then print jobs are
processed without your having to change printer switch settings or
send software commands to accommodate different printer
emulations.
♦
3 - 2 4
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Introduction
This chapter briefly discusses the different methods of printer
configuration and then explains how to use the control panel to
configure the printer.
Printer Configuration Methods
Controlling the Printer through an Application’s Printer
Driver
The easiest way to control the printer is through your application’s
printer driver. See chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer,” of this
manual and your application documentation for information on
choosing and installing a printer driver. If you print from Windows
or a Macintosh, we recommend you use the QMS-developed
Windows or Macintosh driver shipped with your printer, because
it supports all your printer’s special features.
Controlling the Printer with PS Executive Utilities
The PS Executive Series printer utilities software (shipped with the
printer) provides a way to control the printer from a host. The PS
Executive Series Utilities README file and the on-line
documentation explain how to install and use this software.
Controlling the Printer through Printer Commands
The printer can also be controlled through printer commands:
PostScript operators, HP-GL commands, HP PCL 5C commands,
or QMS Document Option Commands (DOCs). DOCs enable
job-specific printer features or features your application or page
description language can’t access. See QMS Crown Document
Option Commands and HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
and the QMS Crown Technical Reference (optional manuals
available from your QMS vendor) for information on these
commands.
Controlling the Printer with the Control Panel
Another way to control the printer is through the Configuration
menu, which you access through the printer’s control panel. The
printer is configured at the factory for the most typical printing
environments, so most users don’t have to enter the Configuration
menu often. However, there are a few situations that may require
you to use the control panel:
■ To configure the printer for printing on a different media
type (for example, transparency instead of paper).
■ To configure features not configurable through your
application.
NOTE: For information on restoring the factory default settings
in
the Configuration
menu, see the
“Administration/Miscellaneous/Restore Defaults”
section later in this chapter.
Configuration Method Priorities
Options or values selected through an application or driver receive
highest priority and override all other options or values. Those
selectedthrough PSExecutive SeriesUtilitieshavesecondpriority.
Those selected through DOCs (Document Option Commands)
have third priority, and those selected through the control panel
have the lowest priority.
4 - 2
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
The LCD Message Window
This message window presents status messages and Configuration
menu options. When you’re in the Configuration menu, the top line
of the message window displays the name of the current menu, and
the bottom line displays the name of an option within that menu.
Status messages display in order of priority if the printer is on line;
they don’t display if the printer is off line. Chapter 9,
“Troubleshooting,” lists and explains status messages.
Use the Clear Warning option to clear a status message that doesn’t
automatically clear after the related corrective action is taken. See
“Administration/Engine/Clear Warning,” later in this chapter, for
details.
The Control Panel LEDs
The LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) on the control panel give
information about printer status:
Illuminated when the printer is on line, ready to accept
and process new print jobs.
Flashes when the printer is receiving data from one or
more of the simultaneous interfaces.
Illuminated when the printer requires operator
intervention.
Illuminated when the standard paper cassette is
selected.
Illuminated when the optional lower cassette is
selected.
4 - 4
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Illuminated when manual feed is selected using the
Tray Select key.
Illuminated when the media in the active cassette has
been defined to be paper.
Illuminated when the media in the active cassette has
been defined to be transparency.
All the LEDs, except Data and Message, are associated with
function keys on the panel.
The Function Keys
The printer control panel has eight function keys. The top row of
keys (Online/Offline, Tray Select, Media, Cancel) is for frequently
usedoperations. The bottom row of keys is used to navigate menus,
select options, and enter values.
NOTE: When you’re in configuration mode (that is, if you have
entered the menu by pressing the Menu key), the printer
ignores the Tray Select, Media, and Cancel keys.
Pressing the Online/Offline key once takes the printer
off line, making the printer ready for configuration.
When the printer goes off line, communication ports
close and accept no new data. Although jobs continue
to compile and print using data already received, a job
may be interrupted when the printer goes off line,
causing it to wait fortherestof thedatabeforefinishing
printing. When the printer is off line, pressing this key
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
once brings it back on line. When the printer is on line
(ready toaccept and process new printjobs), theOnline
LED on the control panel is illuminated.
The Tray Select key allows you to select the cassette
from which to draw print media: the standard (upper)
cassette, the optional (lower) cassette, or the manual
feed tray. The appropriate LED is illuminated to
confirm your choice.
The Media key is used to tell the printer whether paper
or transparencies are in the currently selected cassette.
The factory default for both upper and lower cassettes
is paper.
TheCancel key allows youto cancel the “oldest” job(s)
compiling or printing in the printer, or to send an
end-of-job indicator for a print job. This key can be
used without taking the printer off line. See
“Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs” in chapter 5, “Print
Media and Daily Operations,” for more details.
NOTE: If you accidentally press the Cancel key, press
the Menu key to tell the printer to stop cancelling a job.
Press the Menu key after the printer goes off line to
enter the Configuration menu. In addition, pressing the
Menu key returns you to the next higher menu level,
allowing you to back out of the Configuration menu
one level at a time; tells the printer to stop cancelling a
job when you accidentally press the Cancel key; and
takes you back one character space at a time in an
alphanumeric value.
Press the Select key to enter a menu or to select a menu
option or an individual character in an alphanumeric
value.
Press the Previous key to scroll backwards through the
options in a menuortodecreaseanindividualcharacter
4 - 6
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
in an alphanumeric value.
Press theNext keytoscrollforwardthroughtheoptions
in a menu or to scroll through characters available for
alphanumeric values.
NOTE: Always make sure the printer is idle and off line before
making configuration changes. If the printer is not idle,
jobs may be lost.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Using the Configuration Menu
This section covers how to password-protect menus, how to select
options, and how to enter and save values.
Password-protected Menus
The Operator Control and Administration menus may be
password-protected if an optional security card is used with the
printer. If the message window displays ENTER PASSWORD
whenyou usetheSelectkeyto enteramenu,apasswordis required;
see your system administrator. For information on entering
passwords, see “Entering Alphanumeric Values” later in this
chapter. If an invalid password is entered, the message window
flashes INVALID PASSWORDfor three seconds, then returns you
to the CONFIGURATION menu. If you specify the correct
password, you’re allowed to enter the menu.
Selecting Options
Most menus offer an array of choices within each menu group. For
example, within the Administration menu group, there is a
Communications menu; within the Communications menu there is
a Parallel menu; within the Parallel menu, there is an Emulations
menu, and within the Emulations menu, there are several choices,
such as ESP, PostScript, HP-GL, Lineprinter, and PCL 5C (LN03+
and CCITT are listed if installed).
Table 4.1 shows how to select a menu option, using as an example
configuring the parallel interface for PostScript mode.
NOTE: The printer must be off line and idle for you to change
printer configuration. If the printer is not idle, jobs may
be lost.
4 - 8
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Press
What Happens
Message Window
ONLINE/
OFFLINE
You take the printer off line.
OFFLINE
MENU
NEXT
CONFIGURATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
You enter the Configuration menu.
CONFIGURATION
ADMINISTRATION
You scroll to the Administration
menu.
SELECT
ADMINISTRATION
COMMUNICATIONS
You enter the Administration
menu, and the first submenu,
Communications, displays.
SELECT
You enter the Communications
menu, and the first submenu,
Timeouts, displays.
COMMUNICATIONS
TIMEOUTS
NEXT
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL
You scroll to the Serial menu.
You scroll to the Parallel menu.
NEXT
COMMUNICATIONS
PARALLEL
SELECT
NEXT
You enter the Parallel menu, and
the first submenu, Mode, displays.
PARALLEL
MODE
You scroll to the Emulation menu.
PARALLEL
EMULATION
SELECT
NEXT
EMULATION
*ESP
You enter the Emulation menu,
and the first option, ESP, displays.
EMULATION
POSTSCRIPT
You scroll to the PostScript option.
You select the PostScript option
SELECT
POSTSCRIPT
IS SELECTED
After three seconds, you are
returned to your previous position
in the Parallel menu.
PARALLEL
EMULATION
ONLINE/
OFFLINE
SAVE CHANGES?
NO
You return to the top-level menu.
You scroll to the Yes option.
NEXT
SAVE CHANGES?
YES
SELECT
You save your changes.
You put the printer on lline.
IDLE
ONLINE/
OFFLINE
Table 4.1 Selecting a Configuration Option
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Entering Alphanumeric Values
In some submenus, you choose options by entering an
alphanumeric string instead of by selecting from a list. Entering
alphanumeric values through the control panel is similar to setting
the time and date on a digital watch. You enter the information one
character at a time. To change alphanumeric values in the
Configuration menu
■ Use the Next key to scroll forward through the list of
available characters.
■ Use the Previous key to scroll backwards through the list
of available characters.
■ Use the Select key to move the cursor to the next character
or (when it’s flashing on the last character) to select the
new value.
■ Use the Menu key to move the cursor to the previous
character or, when the cursor’s flashing on the first
character, to select the new value.
When you select a new alphanumeric value, the printer checks to
see if it is valid. If it is invalid, the alphanumeric value reappears
for editing. Press the Menu key to cancel any changes to the value.
A space (no character) is available as a selection. You can set an
alphanumericvalueto null byentering spacesinsteadofcharacters.
Table 4.2 shows how to change an alphanumeric value, using as an
example the scaling percent option in HP-GL emulation. The table
starts in the Administration/Emulations/HP-GL menu.
NOTE: Boxed type in the table below means that the value is
flashing in the message window.
4 - 1 0
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Press
What Happens
Message Window
SELECT
You enter the HP-GL submenu.
HP-GL
SCALING PERCENT
SELECT
NEXT
First character flashes to show it is SCALING PERCENT
ready to be changed.
1 00
You scroll to the next value for
the flashing character.
SCALING PERCENT
2 00
NEXT
You scroll to the next value for
the flashing character.
SCALING PERCENT
3 00
NEXT
You scroll to the next value for
the flashing character.
SCALING PERCENT
4 00
NEXT
You scroll to the next value for
the flashing character.
SCALING PERCENT
5 00
SELECT
SELECT
The second character flashes.
SCALING PERCENT
5 0 0
The last character flashes to show SCALING PERCENT
it is ready to be changed.
50 0
PREVIOUS You scroll to the previous value
for the flashing character, a space
character. This changes the
SCALING PERCENT
50
value from 500 to 50.
SELECT
You choose 50 as the new
setting for Scaling Percent.
50
IS SELECTED
After three seconds, you are
returned to your previous position
in the HP-GL submenu.
HP-GL
SCALING PERCENT
ONLINE/
OFFLINE
You return to the top-level menu.
You scroll to the Yes option.
SAVE CHANGES?
NO
NEXT
SAVE CHANGES?
YES
SELECT
You save your changes.
You put the printer on line.
IDLE
ONLINE/
OFFLINE
Table 4.2 Entering Alphanumeric Values
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Saving Configuration Selections
Press the Online/Offline key to exit the Configuration menu or
press the Menu key to backout of the Configuration menu one level
ata time. If youmadechangesbeforeexiting the menu,the message
window displays
SAVE CHANGES?
NO
If you don’t want the changes you made to take effect, press Select,
and then press the Online/Offline key to put the printer back on
line.
If you want the changes you made to take effect, press the Next key
to change NOto YESand then press the Select key. The changes
are saved and take effect when you put the printer back on line. If
the Message Window displaysWAITING FOR IDLE, the system
is finishing jobs in progress under the old configuration values, but
is not allowing any new jobs to begin. The printer then accepts new
jobs and processes them using the new configuration values.
NOTE: Some menu changes require that the printer be rebooted
before they take effect, including the following:
Operator Control/Media
Administration/Communications/Serial/Mode
Administration/Communications/Parallel/Mode
Administration/Emulations/ESP Default
Administration/Startup Options/Error Handler
Administration/Disk Operations/Spool Overflow
Administration/Disk Operations/Collation
4 - 1 2
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
If you make configuration changes to other menu options and they
don’t seem to be taking effect, wait until the current jobs end, and
then try turning the printer off and on again.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
The Main Menu Groups
The main menu groups in the Configuration menu are Operator
Control and Administration (with the Installation menu also
appearing if a security cartridge is installed) (fig. 4.2). Related
functions are grouped together within submenus. The scrolling
order of menu options on a given level varies.
IDLE
CONFIGURATION
ADMINISTRATION
CONFIGURATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
CONFIGURATION
INSTALLATION (optional)
COMMUNICATIONS
EMULATIONS
SPECIAL PAGES
STARTUP OPTIONS
MEMORY
ENGINE
MISCELLANEOUS
DISK OPERATIONS
COPIES
COLLATION
OPERATOR PASSWRD
USE OPERATOR PWD
ADMIN PASSWORD
USE ADMIN PWD
ORIENTATION
INPUTBIN
CHAIN INPUTBINS
COLOR MODEL
COLOR SEPARATION
MEDIA
MANUAL FEED SIZE
Fig. 4.2 Configuration Menu
4 - 1 4
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
The Installation Menu
The Installation menu (fig. 4.3) appears only when a security card
is in use. This menu is used to password-protect the Operator
Control and Administration menus.
CONFIGURATION
INSTALLATION
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
INSTALLATION
OPERATOR PASSWRD
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
USE ADMIN PWD
USE OPERATOR PWD
INSTALLATION
ADMIN PASSWORD
Fig. 4.3 Installation Menu
Installation/Operator Passwrd
The Operator Passwrd menu allows you to choose the password
(up to 16 characters in length) used to enter the Operator Control
menu when Use Operator Pwd is set to on.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Installation/Use Operator Pwd
The Use Operator Pwd menu determines if a password is required
to enter the Operator Control menu. The choices are on or off; the
factory default is off.
Installation/Admin Password
The Admin Password menu allows you to choose the password (up
to 16 characters) used to enter the Administration menu when Use
Admin Pwd is set to on.
Installation/Use Admin Pwd
The Use Admin Pwd menu determines if a password is required to
enter the Administration menu. The choices are on or off; the
factory default is off.
4 - 1 6
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
The Operator Control Menu
It’s usually better to choose the selections available in Operator
Control within your application, if possible. This is especially true
in anetwork environment,where other users’ jobsare likely to have
different requirements than yours. However, this menu is provided
in case your application or driver doesn’t support all these
selections.
CONFIGURATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
OPERATOR CONTROL
COPIES
OPERATOR CONTROL
COLLATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
MANUAL FEED SIZE
OPERATOR CONTROL
ORIENTATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
MEDIA
OPERATOR CONTROL
INPUTBIN
OPERATOR CONTROL
COLOR SEPARATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
COLOR MODEL
OPERATOR CONTROL
CHAIN INPUTBINS
Fig. 4.4 Operator Control Menu
Operator Control/Media
NOTES:The printer must be turned off and on again before
changes to this menu take effect. The Media key on the
printer’s control panel provides a faster means of
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
changing this setting, but does not contain a thick stock
option.
Use this option to tell the printer what type of media is in each tray
so the printer can optimize output for that media type. To use the
Media menu, first select a media tray (upper for the standard
cassette slot, lower for the optional sheet feeder, or manual for the
manual-feed tray). Then select paper, transparency, or thick stock
for that tray. Select Paper for printing paper, envelopes, or labels.
Select transparency for printing on overhead transparency film.
Select thick stock (for the manual-feed tray only) for printing on
2
2
stock that is between 24 and 43 lb (90 g/m and 163 g/m ). The
factory default is paper.
Operator Control/Copies
Use this option to specify the number of copies of each job sent to
the printer, from 001 to 999. The factory default is 001.
Operator Control/Collation
Use this option to turn collation off or on. The factory default is on.
See “Collating” in chapter 5 for more details.
Operator Control/Orientation
Use this option to determine the orientation of the image on a page,
either portrait (vertical) or landscape (horizontal). The factory
default is portrait.
Operator Control/Inputbin
Use this option to select the input bin (the standard upper cassette
or the optional lower cassette) from which to draw media. The
4 - 1 8
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
factory default is upper. The current selection is indicated by the
corresponding LED.
NOTE: A status message on the control panel will let you know
immediately if the selected cassette isn’t installed. If the
selected cassette is out of paper, a paper out status
message appears when you send the job to be printed.
Operator Control/Chain Inputbins
Use this option to turn on or off cassette switching (chaining) when
the first cassette empties to another cassette with the same size and
type of media. The factory default is off.
Operator Control/Color Separation
Use this option to turn color separation on or off. The factory
default is off.
Operator Control/Color Model
Use this option to select between full-color or monochrome
printing. The factory default is full color. Monochrome must be
selected as the default if you want to print 600 dpi jobs on a printer
with less than 24 MB RAM. You also may want to select
monochrome when printing on legal-size media, because the
printer’s imageable region for full color is limited to 8.1" x 11.7"
(205.90 mm x 297.18 mm).
Operator Control/Manual Feed Size
Whenever you switchmedia sizes in the manualfeedtray,youmust
tell the printer what the new size is. The choices are letter, legal,
executive, A4, DL envelope, and Com 10 envelope. The factory
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
default is letter (or A4). See chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily
Operations,” for more information on media sizes.
NOTE: If the selected paper size doesn’t match the job size
requested, images may be positioned incorrectly on the
page, or may print off the edge of the page. If this
happens, the resulting loose toner may adhere to the back
of subsequent pages.
The Administration Menu
CONFIGURATION
ADMINISTRATION
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
ADMINISTRATION
COMMUNICATIONS
ADMINISTRATION
DISK OPERATIONS
ADMINISTRATION
EMULATIONS
ADMINISTRATION
MISCELLANEOUS
ADMINISTRATION
SPECIAL PAGES
ADMINISTRATION
ENGINE
ADMINISTRATION
STARTUP OPTIONS
ADMINISTRATION
MEMORY
Fig. 4.5 Administration Menu
NOTE: The items designated as factory default indicate those
present when QMS ships the printer. The default of the
system is the value or option last chosen. The options
4 - 2 0
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
within these menus are seldom changed after the initial
system installation.
Administration/Communications
ADMINISTRATION
COMMUNICATIONS
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
COMMUNICATIONS
TIMEOUTS
Optional
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL
NETWORK INTERFACE
COMMUNICATIONS
PARALLEL
COMMUNICATIONS
APPLETALK
Fig. 4.6 Communications Submenu
NOTE: If you have an optional interface installed, see the
documentation that came with it for a description of
options under the Administration/Communications
menu.
Administration/Communications/Timeouts
The Timeouts option sets a limit to the amount of time the printer
waits on transmission from the host for various types of data.
Setting a timeout to 00000 is the same as specifying no timeout.
PS Wait
Timeout
Thenumber ofseconds thatPostScriptemulation mode
waits for incoming data, from 00000 (no timeout) to
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
99999, with a factory default of 00030. If the printer
goes idle after 30 seconds and does not print, this
timeout should be increased. Large jobs, such as
graphics applications or computer-aided design,
require this number to be increased to 00300. Note:
When a print job is sent from a Macintosh, the PS Wait
timeout is automatically changed to 300.
Emul Timeout The number of seconds that emulations other than
PostScript (such as HP-GL or an optional emulation)
wait for additional incoming data, from 00000 (no
timeout) to 99999, with a factory default of 00005.
Job Timeout
The number of seconds the printer spends processing a
job before it ends the job, from 00000 (no timeout) to
99999, with a factory default of 00000 (no timeout).
ESP Timeout
The number of seconds the printer (when set for ESP
mode) spends trying to match emulations before
printing the job using the default emulation
(Administration/Emulations/ESP Default menu), from
00000 (no timeout) to 99999, with a factory default of
00003.
Administration/Communications/Serial
This option allows you to configure the printer-host
communications when using the serial interface.
Mode
Mode allows or disallows the PostScript emulation
interactive mode from the host. The options are
interactive, noninteractive, and disabled. If mode is set
to disabled, the printer accepts no jobs through this
protocol. Interactive mode allows two-way
communication between the host and the printer.
Non-interactive is unidirectional communication from
the host computer to the printer only. The factory
default is interactive. The printer must be rebooted for
a change in this setting to take effect.
Emulation
This option selects the emulation for the printer serial
port. The emulations available are ESP, PostScript, HP
PCL 5C, HP-GL, Lineprinter, and Hexdump. Optional
4 - 2 2
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
emulations, like LN03 Plus and CCITT, appear only if
installed. The factory default emulation is ESP.
Min K Spool
The minimum amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the
serial interface. Do not set this value greater than K
Mem for Spool. The default is 00015.
Spool Timeout Thenumberofsecondstheinterface waits fordatafrom
the host system before terminating a print job. The
minimum value is 00000 (no timeout), the maximum
value is 99999, and the factory default value is 00030.
End Job Mode This option enables or disables data stream sensing for
end-of-document (EOD) terminator strings. These
sequences allow host computers to enforce print job
sequencing without considerations for interacting
timeouts. The values are none (printer recognizes only
the PostScript ^D command), QMS EOD
(%%EndOfDocument),
and
HP
EOD
(<ESC>%-12345X). The factory default is none. See
“Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs” in chapter 5 for
more details.
Baud Rate
The baud rate is a measure of the rate of transmission
(bits per second) from host to printer over the serial
channel. The baud rate options are 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400. The factory
defaultis9600. Hostandprinterbaud ratesmustmatch.
Baud rates of 19200 and 38400 require either RTS or
CTS hardware flow control (Hdwe Flow Ctl). These
baud rates do not support XON/XOFF software flow
control (Rcv Sw Flow CTL).
Parity
Parity acts as a check bit to identify data transmission
errors. The options are none, mark, space, odd, or even.
The host or application parity setting must match the
printer’s parity setting. The factory default is none.
Ignore Parity Ignore parity options are off or on; the factory default
is off.
Rcv Sw
Flow Ctl
The software communication protocol used by the
printer to control communication from the host. The
options are XON/XOFF, robust XON/XOFF,
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
ETX/ACK, and none. The factory default is
XON/XOFF.
Xmit Sw
The software communication protocol used by the host
to control communication with the printer. The options
are none, XON/XOFF, ETX/ACK. The factory default
is none.
Flow Ctl
Data Bits
Stop Bits
The number of data bits (either 7 bits or 8 bits)
transmitted per character. The factory default is 8 data
bits.
The number of stop bits (either 1 bit or 2 bits)
transmitted per character. The factory default is 1 bit.
Hdwe Flow
Ctl
Allthe hardwareflow controlsettings mustbethesame
as those of the host. The options are DSR POL (Data
Set Ready Polarity: high or low; factory default low),
DSR (Data Set Ready: on or off; factory default off),
DTR POL(Data Terminal Ready Polarity: high or low;
factory default low), DTR (Data Terminal Ready: on
or off; factory default on), RTS (Request to Send: on
or off; factory default off), and CTS (Clear to Send: on
or off; the factory default is off).
PS Protocol
This option sets the binary communications protocol
(BCP) for communicating over a serial, parallel, or
optional network interface to a PostScript printer. BCP
allows any 8-bit binary value (0-255) to be treated as
data while allowing a few of the values to function as
special control characters.
Four choices are available through the PS Protocol
submenu for the serial interface. The default is normal.
Normal: Enables standard, ASCII hex protocol. Data
is sent and received in ASCII format. Print jobs can
alter this value through PostScript operators.
Normal Fixed: Enables standard, ASCII hex protocol.
Print jobs cannot alter this value through PostScript
operators.
BinaryEnables binary communications protocol
(BCP). Print jobs can alter this value through
PostScript operators.
4 - 2 4
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Binary Fixed: Enables binary communications
protocol (BCP). Print jobs cannot alter this value
through PostScript operators.
When PS Protocol is set to the normal fixed or binary
fixed mode and a print job sends PostScript operators
to change the input device mode, the operators are
accepted but not acted upon. See appendix D,
“Additional Technical Information,” for more
information on PS Protocol.
Administration/Communications/Parallel
This option allows you to configure the printer to match the host
communications when using the parallel interface.
Mode
Mode allows or disallows the PostScript emulation
interactive mode from the host. The options are
interactive, noninteractive, and disabled. If disabled,
the printer accepts no jobs through this protocol.
Interactive mode allows two-way communication
between the host and the printer. Noninteractive is
unidirectional communication from the host to the
printer only. The factory default is noninteractive. The
printer must be rebooted for a change in this setting to
take effect.
Emulation
This optionselects theemulation for theprinter parallel
port. The choices available for Emulations are ESP,
PostScript, HP PCL 5C, HP-GL, Lineprinter, and
Hexdump. Optional emulations, like LN03 Plus and
CCITT, appear only if installed. The factory default
emulation is ESP.
Min K Spool
The minimum of RAM (KB) dedicated to the parallel
interface. Do not set this value greater than K Mem for
Spool. The default setting is 00015.
Spool Timeout The number of seconds the parallel interface waits for
data from the host system before terminating a print
job, from 00000 (no timeout) to 99999, with a factory
default of 00030.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Data Bits
The number of data bits (either 7 bits or 8 bits)
transmitted per character. The factory default is 8 data
bits.
End Job Mode This option enables or disables data stream sensing for
end-of-document (EOD) terminator strings. These
sequences allow host computers to enforce print job
sequencing without considerations for interacting
timeouts. The values are none (printer recognizes only
the PostScript ^D command), QMS EOD
(%%EndOfDocument),
and
HP
EOD
(<ESC>%-12345X). The factory default is none. See
“Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs” in chapter 5 for
more details.
PS Protocol
This option sets the binary communications protocol
(BCP) for communicating over a serial, parallel, or
optional network interface to a PostScript printer.
Choices for the parallel interface are normal, normal
fixed, binary, and binary fixed. The default is normal.
Descriptions of these options are in
“Administration/Communications/Serial,” earlier in
this section.
Administration/Communications/AppleTalk
This option allows you to configure printer-host computer
communications when using the AppleTalk interface.
Mode
Mode enables or disables the PostScript emulation
interactive mode from the host. The default is enabled.
If disabled, the printer accepts no jobs through this
protocol.
Connection
Connection allows you to enable or disable print
spooling. The options are Conventional and Spool.
Conventional, the factory default option, allows one
AppleTalk connection and accepts only one print job
at a time. If two users send print jobs to the printer, the
workstation belonging to the first user is tied up until
the first job has been printed, and the workstation
belonging to the second user is tied up until both jobs
have been printed. The Spool option allows multiple
AppleTalk connections and accepts (spools) more than
4 - 2 6
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
one print job at a time. Workstations are not tied up
while jobs are printing.
Min K Spool
The minimum amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the
LocalTalk interface. Do not set this value greater than
K Mem for Spool. The default is 00015.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Administration/Communications/Network Interface
This option allows you to configure printer-host communications
when using an optional interface card. Appendix D of this manual,
“Additional Technical Information,” contains information about
the PS Protocol option. See the documentation that came with the
interface card for details on other options.
Administration/Emulations
NOTE: The Emulations menu allows you to customize emulation
settings. To choose an emulation or ESP for a particular
interface, see that interface menu in the
Administration/Communications menu.
ADMINISTRATION
EMULATIONS
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
EMULATIONS
ESP DEFAULT
Optional
EMULATIONS
OPTIONAL EMULATION
EMULATIONS
POSTSCRIPT
EMULATIONS
LINEPRINTER
EMULATIONS
HP-GL
EMULATIONS
HP PCL 5C
Fig. 4.7 Emulations Submenu
Administration/Emulations/PostScript
Within the Emulations/PostScript menuare aPostScript Emulation
Level option, a Default Halftone option, a Default CRD (Color
4 - 2 8
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Rendering Dictionary) option, a Default Dithering option, and a
Gamma Correction option.
Default
Halftone
This option allows you to choose a printer default
halftone from the following settings: 106 (screen lines
per inch) x 45° (screen angles), 71 lpi x 45°, 80 lpi x
45°, 53 lpi x 45°, and the factory default Enhanced
setting. The Enhanced setting gives the best results for
most jobs, especially jobs containing a mixture of text,
graphics, or sampled images. See chapter 7,
“Optimizing Color Output,” for information about the
halftone settings and their uses.
NOTE: If you choose halftones settings (such as line
frequencies or spot functions) in your application,
those settings probably take precedence over the
halftones in the Default Halftone menu.
Emulation
Level
This option allows you to choose either PostScript
Level 1 emulation or PostScript Level 2 emulation as
your printer’s default PostScript emulation. This
option is useful if you have files prepared in an
application that is not fully compatible with Adobe’s
PostScript Level 2 page description language.
However, Level 2 works for Level 2 files and most
Level 1 files. The default is PostScript Level 2
emulation.
Default CRD
(Color
Rendering
Dictionary)
For color matching with PostScript Level 2
applications, this option allows you to choose from the
following color rendering dictionaries: Colorimetric
600, Colorimetric 300, Business 600 (the factory
default), Business 300, Photographic 600, and
Photographic 600. Since the printer has a different
range of colors than other color devices (such as your
monitor), a color rendering dictionary is necessary to
tell the printer how to print colors that are out of its
range. See “Printer-Resident Color Rendering
Dictionaries” in chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,”
for more information on choosing a CRD. Additional
CRDs may be available from your QMS vendor.
Default
Dithering
This option allows you to specify the default dither
pattern used by the printer. The choices are standard,
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
enhanced low, enhanced medium, and enhanced high.
Standard, the factory default setting, is
PostScript-compatible dithering. Enhanced dithering
reduces the banding sometimes seen in
PostScript-compatible dithering, with enhanced high
producing the least banding. The factory-default
Standard setting should not be changed if you are using
the factory-default Enhanced halftone setting.
Gamma
Correction
This option allows you to choose the amount of
gamma correction for the printer. Choices are
Gamma71 (0)
Gamma53 (1)
Gamma80 (2)
Gamma106 (3)
None
(4)
The default is None. The factory-default None set-
ting should not be changed if you are using the fac-
tory-default Enhanced halftone setting. Otherwise,
the gamma setting should correspond to the printer
default halftone chosen. (For example, when the 53
lpi x 45° halftone is selected, the Gamma53 gamma
setting should be selected.)
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter
Twelve configuration choices are available:
Font
In this submenu, you can enter the name of a font (any
PostScriptfont on theprinter)to be usedfor Lineprinter
jobs. The factory default is Courier. To see a list of
PostScript fonts available, print an advanced status
page from the front control panel (from the
Administration/Special Pages/Print Status submenu).
Point Sz
100ths
Sets the five-digit value used to specify the point size
of the font for the current print job. The range is from
00400 (4 points) to 25600 (256 points). The default is
00880 (8.8 points).
Character
Maps
Specifies the type of character map to be used. The
choices are ASCII and EBCDIC. The default is ASCII.
4 - 3 0
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Line
Numbering
Specifies that a five-digit number is to be prefixed to
the beginning of each line. The choices are On and Off.
Off is the default.
Tab
Stops
Specifies the number of spaces between tab stops. The
minimum is 0 and the maximum is 256. The default is
8.
LF IS CRLF
CR IS CRLF
Stipulates whether each line feed in the print job is
translated to a carriage return/linefeed combination.
The choices are On and Off. On is the default.
Determines whether each carriage return in the print
job is translated to a carriage return/line feed
combination. The choices are On and Off. Off is the
default.
FF IS CRFF
Stipulates whether each form feed in the print job is
translated to a carriage return/form feed combination.
The options are On and Off. On is the default.
Orientation
Autowrap
Specifies whether text is printed Portrait or Landscape.
The default is Portrait.
Indicates whether long lines are to be wrapped onto the
next lineinstead of being truncated. The options areOn
and Off. The default is on.
Lines
Per Page
Specifies the number of lines printed on a page before
an automatic page eject. Interline spacing is set to the
selected point size. Logical pages consisting of more
lines than specified are split into multiple pages. The
minimumLinesPerPage settingis1, andthemaximum
is 128. The default is 87.
Margins
This option defines the left, right, top, and bottom
margins from 0 to 17 inches. The minimum setting is
0 and the maximum is 1700. The default is 0.
Administration/Emulations/HP-GL
Fifteen configuration choices are available. The QMS Crown
TechnicalReference (anoptionalmanual available fromyourQMS
vendor) has more information on HP-GL.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Plotter
Choices include 7550A (the factory default), 7475A,
7470A, and ColorPro.
Scaling
Percent
Choices range from 1 to 150 percent of the original
size. The default is 100 percent.
NOTE: To scale plots, select the paper size originally
used for the plot in the Paper Type menu; then enter the
reduction or enlargement needed to fit the plot on the
new page in the Scaling Percent menu. If necessary,
enter new x,y coordinates in the Origin menu to
reposition the plot on the page.
Origin
Choices range from 0 to 850 to the right (x direction)
and 0 to 1100 upward (y direction) in.001" increments.
In normal orientation, the 0,0 origin point is the
lower-left corner (when the page is viewed in
landscape orientation) of the imageable area. The
default values are 0000 in the x direction and 0000 in
the y direction.
Reverse
Image
This option applies only to monochrome printing.
Choices are off (black on a white background) and on
(white on a black background). The default is off.
Enhanced
Mode
This option allows you to choose enhanced resolution
for HP-GL output. Choices are off (standard resolution
for fixed- and variable-spaced fonts, 4 x 8 grid) and on
(enhanced resolution for variable-spaced fonts, 26 x 36
grid). The default is off. Use the enhanced mode for
7550A plotter emulation.
Expand
Mode
Choices areoffand on(default scalingpoints,hard-clip
plotting range, and maximum plotting area are all
expanded). The default is off.
Paper Type
Pens 1-8
Choices are A, A3, A4, B, and Scale to Paper (the
factory default). Select the media size for which the
plot was originally created.
Pen width choices range from .1 mm to 6 mm, in 0.1
mm increments (you can also enter a value of 0 for a
1-pixel wide line). Color choices are black, violet,
brown, 25% gray, 50% gray, 75% gray, red, orange,
yellow, green, blue, cyan, and magenta.
4 - 3 2
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
The default pen width is 07 (0.7 mm) for pen 1 and 03
(0.3 mm) for all other pens. The default color settings
are as follows: pen 1-black, pen 2-black, pen 3-red, pen
4-green, pen 5-blue, pen 6-violet, pen 7-orange, and
pen 8-brown.
Administration/Emulations/HP PCL 5C
See the QMS Crown Technical Reference and the HP PCL 5
Emulation Technical Reference (optional manuals available from
your QMS vendor) for more information on HP PCL. Also, the HP
PCL 5C Technical Support Notes, available free through our
bulletin board, Q-FAX, and CompuServe, has information on HP
PCL 5C.
Default
Font
Sets the printer default fonts. Choices are Courier 10
point (12 pitch), Courier 10 Bold, Courier 10 Italic,
Courier 12 point (10 pitch), Courier 12 Bold, Courier
12 Italic, Times, Times Bold, Times Italic, Times Bold
Italic, Universe, Universe Bold, Universe Italic,
Universe Bold Italic, Universe Condensed, Universe
Condensed Bold, Universe Condensed Italic, Universe
Condensed Bold Italic, Lineprinter (8.5 point, 16.66
pitch), and Select by Index. The Courier and
Lineprinter fonts are bitmapped; the others are
scalable. The default is Courier 12 point (10 pitch).
Symbol
Set
Sets the value for the character set used by PCL 5C
jobs. Choices include Roman-8, PC-850, PC8-US,
PC8-DN, ECMA-94, Legal, HP German, HP Spanish,
ISO 2, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 10, ISO 11, ISO 14, ISO 15,
ISO 16, ISO 17, ISO 21, ISO 25, ISO 57, ISO 60, ISO
61, ISO 69, ISO 84, ISO 85, Desktop, PS Math, Math
8, Microsoft-Pub, PI-Font, PS-Text, Ventura-Intl,
Ventura-Math, Ventura-US, Windows, PS-Zapf-
Dingbats, Ventura-Dingbats, Zapf-Dingbats100,
Zapf-Dingbats200, Zapf-Dingbats300. The default is
Roman-8.
Lines
Per Inch
Sets the number of lines printed per inch. The factory
default is 6.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Line
Termination
Adds an indicator that controls the way the printer
interprets CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed)
characters. The options are CR=CR, LF=LF;
CR=CR+LF, LF=LF; CR=CR, LF=CR+LF; CR or
LF=CR+LF. The factory default is CR=CR, LF=LF.
Point Size
x100
Identifies the point size in hundredths and is selectable
in increments of 25. The minimum value is 25, the
maximum is 99975, and the default is 1200.
Retain
Temporary
Allows you to choose whether or not to retain
temporary PCL 5C macros and fonts at the end of each
print job. The options are on (save the temporary
macros and fonts) and off (temporary fonts and macros
are deleted at the end of each job). The default value is
off.
Scalable
Fonts
Specifies whether to enable or disable the printing of
PCL 5 scalable fonts. The choices are enable (the
factory default) and disable. When you enable this
option and print PCL 4 documents, PCL 5 may
substitute scalable fonts that could cause your PCL 4
documents to print incorrectly. When this option is
disabled, fonts are bitmapped. This option is designed
to be used for PCL 4 documents that print incorrectly
under PCL 5.
Default
Font IDX
Sets the default font index when Select by Index is
chosen in the Default Font menu. It is a numeric value
with a minimumsettingof 0, a maximum of 32767, and
default of 0.
Monochrome Determines whether HP-GL 2 documents are printed
GL/2
in shades of gray (on) or color (off); the default is color
(off).
Default:
Off
Pen Color Defaults:
Pen 0 = White
Pen 1 = Black
Pen 2 = Red
Pen 3 = Green
4 - 3 4
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Pen 4 = Yellow
Pen 5 = Blue
Pen 6 = Magenta
Pen 7 = Cyan
Range:
On
Sets the printer to monochrome (2 pen).
Off
Sets the printer to color (8 pens).
When set to on, the printer maps each pen to its as-
signed color, then converts the color to a grayscale
using the National Television System Committee
(NTSC) color standard for luminosity coefficients
(Additive System): Y = .3R + .59G + .11B
Example of how to use the Color Standard: Formula
White
Black
Red
Y = [(1*0.3) + (1*0.59) + (1*0.11)]100% gray
Y = [(0*0.3) + (0*0.59) + (0*0.11)]0% gray
Y = [(1*0.3) + (0*0.59) + (0*0.11)]30% gray
Y = [(0*0.3) + (1*0.59) + (0*0.11)]59% gray
Y = [(1*0.3) + (1*0.59) + (0*0.11)]89% gray
Y = [(0*0.3) + (0*0.59) + (1*0.11)]11% gray
Y = [(1*0.3) + (0*0.59) + (1*0.11)]41% gray
Y = [(0*0.3) + (1*0.59) + (1*0.11)]70% gray
Green
Yellow
Blue
Magenta
Cyan
Download
Location
Controls the default storage location of PCL objects
(fonts, macros, and patterns) when not otherwise
specified through QMS Document Option Commands
(DOCs). Choices are Disk (all downloaded PCL
objects are stored in the default disk resource, if
present) and Memory (all downloaded PCL objects are
stored in temporary storage in RAM). Disk is the
default setting. DOCs specifying resources override
this optionon a per-jobbasis. Ifthisoption is set toDisk
and no hard disk is installed, memory is used as the
default storage location. If the printer has both a hard
disk and a large amount of memory, setting this option
to Memory enhances printer performance. See QMS
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Document Option Commands for more information on
DOC.
Other Optional Emulations
If you have an optional emulation installed, such as LN03 Plus, see
the documentation that came with it for a description of the options
under the Administration/ Emulations menu. The QMS Crown
Technical Reference and QMS Document Option Commands
(optional manuals available from your QMS vendor) also have
information on optional emulations.
Administration/Emulations/ESP Default
This setting tells the printer what emulation to default to if the
printer’s emulation sensing technology is unable to identify the
emulation needed for a particular job. Default emulation options
include PostScript, PCL 5C, HP-GL, and Lineprinter. Optional
emulations,suchasLN03Plus, appearonly ifinstalled.Thefactory
default emulation for ESP is PCL 5C. Any change to this option
takes effect only after turning the printer off and on again.
4 - 3 6
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Administration/Special Pages
ADMINISTRATION
SPECIAL PAGES
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
SPECIAL PAGES
PRINT STATUS
SPECIAL PAGES
SPECIAL PAGES
STATUS PAGE TYPE
REGISTRATION PG
SPECIAL PAGES
TRAILER INPUTBIN
SPECIAL PAGES
SAMPLE PAGE
SPECIAL PAGES
TRAILER PAGE
SPECIAL PAGES
HEADER PAGE
SPECIAL PAGES
HEADER INPUTBIN
Fig. 4.8 Special Pages Submenu
Administration/Special Pages/Print Status
Use this option to print a printer-status page. The standard status
page lists printer identification information and settings, current
memory configuration, timeout values, communication settings,
and input buffer sizes. It also has tickmarks for measuring the
printer’s alignment. The advanced status page option has the same
information as the standard one with the addition of configuration
menu settings, fonts, and downloaded emulations. The
Administration/Special Pages/Status Page Type menu, discussed
later in this section, controls which type, standard or advanced,
prints. For more details, see “The Status Pages” in chapter 5.”
Administration/Special Pages/Registration Pg
This option controls the printing of a registration page. This page
allows you to check color registration (placement of each of the
process colors on the page). Color marks going around the outside
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
of the page demonstrate horizontal and vertical color registration.
Circles in the center of the page demonstrate cyan, magenta, and
yellow color mixtures and red, green, and blue color mixtures.
Administration/Special Pages/Sample Page
This option controls the printing of a sample page. This page gives
the current screen frequency and halftone angles settings for the
printer. A bar that illustrates printing with these settings prints
across the bottom of the page.
Administration/Special Pages/Header Page
This option controls the printing of a header banner page before
each job. This page contains the following: printer name, selected
interface, job identification, title, submitting computer, job owner,
routing message, start time/date, application used, creation
time/date, copyright date, versionnumber,jobsubmission time,job
start time, and printer product name/logo. For details on this page
and what it monitors, see “Header and Trailer Pages” in chapter 5.
This option is either on or off; the factory default is off.
NOTE: The information on header pages for this printer can be
customized; QMS Crown Document Option Commands
(an optional manual available from your QMS vendor)
contains more information on customizing separator
pages.
Administration/Special Pages/Header Inputbin
You can select the inputbin (tray or cassette) from which the printer
pulls media when printing the header page. Choices are upper and
lower. Upper is the factory default.
NOTE: If you used the Administration/Engine/Inputbin x Name
option to change the names of the input bins, these names
replace upper and lower in the message window.
4 - 3 8
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Administration/Special Pages/Trailer Page
This option controls the printing of a trailer banner/error page for
each print job. A trailer page helps you monitor jobs. Think of it as
an accounting or tracking system. For details on this page and what
it monitors, see “Header and Trailer Pages” in chapter 5. The trailer
page also lists any errors generated by the printer while processing
or printing your document.
This option can be set to off, on, on error, and errors only with the
default being off. Setting this option to on error prints a trailer page
(with error messages generated during processing and printing of
your job) only if any error occurred. Setting it to errors only prints
error messages on the trailer page and omits other trailer page
information.
Administration/Special Pages/Trailer Inputbin
You can select the inputbin (tray or cassette) from which the printer
pulls media when printing the trailer page. Choices are upper and
lower. Upper is the factory default.
NOTE: If you used the Administration/Engine/Inputbin x Name
option to change the names of the input bins, these names
replace Upper and Lower in the message window.
Administration/Special Pages/Status Page Type
This option controls the type of status page to print. The options
are standard (the default) or advanced. See
“Administration/Special Pages/Print Status” earlier in this section
for a description of the two types of status pages.
Administration/Startup Options
This menu(fig.4.9) allows youto configureyourprinter to perform
certain actions automatically when it is turned on.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
ADMINISTRATION
STARTUP OPTIONS
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
STARTUP OPTIONS
DO START PAGE
STARTUP OPTIONS
DO ERROR HANDLER
STARTUP OPTIONS
DO SYS START
Fig. 4.9 Startup Options Submenu
Administration/Startup Options/Do Start Page
This option allows you to enable and disable the start-up page.
Choices are yes and no. The factory default is yes.
Administration/Startup Options/Do Sys Start
If you have a hard disk and Do Sys Start is enabled, whenever the
printer is turned on, the controller checks the hard disk for a
SYS\START file and executes this file. Choices for Do Sys Start
are yes and no. The factory default is yes. More information on
creating a SYS\START file is available in the QMS Crown
TechnicalReference (anoptionalmanual available fromyourQMS
vendor) and from Q-FAX. See appendix A, “QMS Customer
Support,” for information on Q-FAX.
Administration/Startup Options/Do Error Handler
When this option is enabled, if a PostScript error occurs during a
PostScript print job, a page is generated reporting the error. This
information is used by QMS technicians (or users familiar with
4 - 4 0
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
PostScript) for troubleshooting. The PostScript Language
Reference Manual (Adobe Systems, Reading, MA:
Addison-Wesley, 1990. ISBN 0-201-18127-4) contains more
information on PostScript errors. Choices for this option are yes
and no. The factory default is no.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Administration/Memory
This section briefly explains what each memory client does. See
appendix D, “Additional Technical Information,” for detailed
information on the printer’s memory and what benefits, if any, may
result from adding memory to a particular client.
ADMINISTRATION
MEMORY
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
MEMORY
K MEM FOR SPOOL
MEMORY
MEMORY
MB PRINTER MEM
K MEM FOR PSHEAP
MEMORY
MEMORY
K MEM DISK CACHE
K MEM PS FONTS
MEMORY
MEMORY
K MEM FRAMEBUFF
K MEM EMULATION
MEMORY
MEMORY
K MEM DISPLAY
K MEM EMUL TMP
Fig. 4.10 Memory Submenu
To find out how memory is currently allocated, print a status page
(this option is in the Administration/Special Pages menu) or check
each client individually in the Configuration menu. The printer
automatically reallocates added or freed memory to either the
Display List or the Frame Buffer client, whichever asks for it first.
This is the best place for it for most users, but it can be reallocated
to other memory clients.
Keep in mind, though, that misallocating memory may hinder
printer performance, and that the printer engine’s fastest speed is
4 - 4 2
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
3 pages per minute for 2- or 3-color jobs, 2 pages per minute for
4-color, and 8 pages per minute for black and white, no matter how
you configure the memory. If you try to set a memory client below
a minimum required value or above a maximum allowable value,
the message INCORRECT VALUE appears in the message
window.
Administration/Memory/K Mem for Spool
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the spooling buffers.
Incoming print job data is stored in this memory client until it is
processed and printed. The size range and default varies depending
upon the amount of RAM available on your system. (Also, see the
“Administration/Disk Operations/Spool Overflow” later in this
section.)
Administration/Memory/K Mem for PSHeap
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the PostScript
emulation interpreter. This memory holds downloaded PostScript
emulation fonts, operators, and forms. The size range and default
varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your
system. This memory client is also known as virtual memory.
Administration/Memory/K Mem PS Fonts
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to caching previously
scaled bitmap representations of fonts for the PostScript emulation
interpreter. This reduces the numberof times aPostScript font must
be converted from outline form to bitmap form, thus reducing
processing time. The size range and default varies depending upon
the amount of RAM available on your system.
Administration/Memory/K Mem Emulation
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to non-PostScript
emulations for temporary storage and for loading optional
emulations. The size range and default varies depending upon the
amount of RAM available on your system. If you are using the
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
optional CCITT emulation, this value should be increased by 200
KB.
Administration/Memory/K Mem Emul Tmp
This is the amount of RAM (KB) to be used by non-PostScript
emulations for storing downloaded fonts. The size range and
default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on
your system.
Administration/Memory/K Mem Display
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the display lists. The
display list client holds the intermediate representation of pages to
be printed in compressed blocks of data. The size range and default
varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your
system.
Administration/Memory/K Mem Framebuff
This is the amount of system RAM (KB) dedicated to the frame
buffers. This client holds rasterized pages that are ready to be
transferred to the print engine. The amount of frame buffer storage
affects the maximum size of any single page. The size range and
default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on
your system. For example, the factory default setting for a printer
with 12 MB of RAM is the amount of memory necessary to print
a four-color letter- or A4-size page in 300 dpi resolution. The
factory default setting for a printer with 24 MB of RAM is the
amount necessary to print a four-color letter- or A4-size page in
600 dpi resolution.
Administration/Memory/K Mem Disk Cache
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the disk cache, the
area in which frequently used data is stored so it does not have to
be continually read from and written to a hard disk (either the
standardinternaldrive or anoptionalexternaldrive). Thesizerange
4 - 4 4
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available
on your system.
If not enough memory is available for this client, some or all of the
optional hard disks may not be accessible and/or an insufficient
number of disk cache blocks may be available.
Administration/Memory/MB Printer Mem
This memory client cannot be changed: it is the amount of RAM
installed in the printer that is available to be split among the other
memory clients.
NOTE: This isn’t the same as the amount of physical RAM
present in the printer. Because the downloaded system
software occupies approximately 3 MB, the amount of
physical RAM required will be 3 MB more than the
amount of RAM available to configurable memory
clients.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Administration/Engine
ADMINISTRATION
ENGINE
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
ENGINE
IMAGE ALIGNMENT
ENGINE
ENGINE
DEFAULT PAPER
CLEAR WARNING
ENGINE
ENGINE
DEFAULT RESOLUTION
OUTPUTBIN NAME
ENGINE
ENGINE
PAGE RECOVERY
INPUTBIN 2 NAME
ENGINE
ENGINE
MAN FEED TIMEOUT
INPUTBIN 1 NAME
Fig. 4.11 Engine Submenu
4 - 4 6
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Administration/Engine/Image Alignment
The Image Alignment option allows you to adjust the horizontal
and vertical placement of printed images. To check image
alignment, print a standard status page (this option is located in the
Administration/Special Pages menu). When the printer is placing
images properly, the alignment tickmarks at the lower left of a
status page are 0.5"/12.7 mm from the left and bottom edges of the
page. If the tickmarks are off, use this option to align the image
horizontally and vertically in pixel increments (1⁄300" or .08 mm),
from 000 to 300 pixels (300 pixels = 1" or 25.4 mm). The factory
default settingis 100. Valuesabove100move the image to theright
(for horizontal alignment) or down (for vertical alignment); values
below 100 move the image left (for horizontal alignment) or up (for
vertical alignment). See “Entering Alphanumeric Values,” earlier
in this chapter, if you’re not sure how to enter a number in the
message window.
NOTE: Engine constraints may limit the accuracy of pixel
alignment.
Administration/Engine/Default Paper
Default Paper specifies a media size for the printer to use if it does
not recognize the size specified for a job. The choices are letter and
A4. The factory default is letter. Change the default to A4 if you
print on metric-size media.
Administration/Engine/Inputbin 1 Name
Use this option to assign a name to the standard paper cassette
(input bin). For example, you may want to name it “Letterhead” if
you always keep letterhead paper in that cassette. The factory
default is upper.
Administration/Engine/Inputbin 2 Name
Usethisoptiontoassignanametotheoptionallower cassette(input
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
bin). For example, you may want to name it “Plain” if you always
keep plain paper in that cassette. The factory default is lower.
Administration/Engine/Outputbin Name
Even though there is only one output bin (the output tray), you may
want to use this option to assign a name to the outputbin on the top
of your printer. The factory default is upper.
Administration/Engine/Clear Warning
Use this option to clear a status message that doesn’t automatically
clear after the related corrective action is taken; for example, TOP
COVER OPENclears after you close the top cover, but REPLACE
BELTdoes not clear automatically after a new OPC belt cartridge
is installed. Options in this menu include all status messages that
don’t automatically clear. Select the message that you want to clear
after correcting the specified status. See “Status Messages” in
chapter 9 for details.
NOTE: If youclear REPLACE FUSERor 100K CHECKUP, the
counter that tracks that particular service resets to 0 and
the message does not reappear until after another
complete cycle. If you continue to use the printer without
the proper maintenance or part replacement, print quality
can deteriorate, and the wear on the printer can shorten
the printer’s life.
Administration/Engine/Default Resolution
This option allows you to choose either 600 or 300 dpi printing.
The factory default setting is 600 dpi. If you purchased a printer
with 12 MB RAM, you can print color or monochrome documents
in 300 dpi or you can print monochrome documents in 600 dpi.
You must upgrade printer RAM to be able to print color documents
in 600 dpi. (See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for
specific information on RAM requirements and color resolution.)
If you want to print 600 dpi monochrome documents on a printer
4 - 4 8
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
with 12 MB RAM, make sure you select Monochrome in the
Operator Control/Color Model menu. Also, if you change the
resolution, you should choose the appropriate halftone setting and
gamma correction setting for best results.
Administration/Engine/Page Recovery
Use this option to enable or disable page recovery. The default is
enabled.Enabling pagerecoverycausestheprinterto automatically
reprint jammed pages (as long as the printer is not turned off while
the jammed is being cleared). You may want to disable jam
recovery to free up printer memory, and enhance performance.
Administration/Engine/Manfeed Timeout
This refers to the number of seconds the printer waits for media to
be inserted in the manual feed slot before abandoning the job. This
variable has a minimum value of 00000 (no timeout), a maximum
of 00300, and a factory default of 00060.
Administration/Engine/Energy Saver
The Energy Saver option specifies whether the printer changes to
a lower-power state (the engine remains on, but the fuser turns off)
after the printer is inactive for a user-defined length of time. The
options are Off, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, or 3 hours
(of idle time before activation of low-power state). The factory
default setting is 60 minutes. If you have an Energy Star version
of the printer (look for a label with the Energy Star logo on the back
of the printer), Energy Saver causes printer power consumption to
drop to less than 45 W. If you don’t have the Energy Star version
of the printer, thenEnergySavercausesprinter powerconsumption
to drop to about 147 W. When a print job is received, the printer
returns to normal power in about 90 seconds.
NOTE: The addition of some optional interfaces, in some
combinations, may cause the product to become
non-Energy Star compliant.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Administration/Miscellaneous
The Miscellaneous menu (fig. 4.12) allows you to restore factory
defaults, protect current defaults, and choose a message window
language.
ADMINISTRATION
MISCELLANEOUS
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
MISCELLANEOUS
RESTORE DEFAULTS
MISCELLANEOUS
MISCELLANEOUS
PERMANENT CHANGE
KEYPAD LANGUAGE
Fig. 4.12 Miscellaneous Submenu
Administration/Miscellaneous/Restore Defaults
This option allows you to reset all configuration values to their
original factory defaults. The choices are yes and no; the factory
default is no. During this process, which takes several minutes to
complete, the printer reinitializes itself.
If the Configuration menu locks up and you cannot access this
option, you can reset all configuration values to their factory
defaults by simultaneously holding down the and Online/Offline
keys (for about 10 seconds) while turning the printer off and on
again.
Administration/Miscellaneous/Permanent Change
If set to off, this option prevents a print job from making permanent
4 - 5 0
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
configuration changes to the printer’s non-volatile memory. PS
Executive Series Utilities (the host software that comes with your
printer) is an example of a program that generates print jobs to
change the printer’s non-volatile memory, where printer defaults
are stored. Non-volatile means data in this memory remains even
if the printer is turned off and back on. Setting this option to on
allows print jobs to change the non-volatile memory. The choices
are on and off; the factory default is off.
Administration/Miscellaneous/Keypad Language
This option allows you to set the language in the message window
to English, French, German, or Spanish. The factory default
message window language is English. Changing the keypad
language will cause the printer to re-initialize automatically.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Administration/Disk Operations
This menu (fig. 4.13) controls the internal hard disk as well as any
optional hard disk(s) attached to the printer’s SCSI port. See
chapter 8, “Printer Options,” for more information about using the
Disk Operations menu. The QMS Crown Technical Reference (an
optional manual available from your QMS vendor) also contains
information about hard disks.
ADMINISTRATION
DISK OPERATIONS
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
DISK OPERATIONS
INSTALL OPTION
DISK OPERATIONS
COLLATION
DISK OPERATIONS
REMOVE OPTION
DISK OPERATIONS
SPOOL OVERFLOW
DISK OPERATIONS
FORMAT DISK
Fig. 4.13 Disk Operations Submenu
NOTE: If an error occurs during disk operations, an error
message displays until the Menu key is pressed. The
operation must then berestarted from the beginning.Two
error messages you may see are READ FAILURE(the
drive has encountered a read error) and WRITE ERROR
(either the hard disk had a write error or there is no room
for data on the hard disk or in RAM).
4 - 5 2
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
CAUTION: If you connect to this printer an external hard disk you
previously used with an earlier QMS Crown printer, this QMS
magicolor LX printer software automatically reorganizes the files
on the hard disk when the printer is turned off and back on again.
After this reorganization, the files on the hard disk can no longer
be accessed if the hard disk is reattached to the earlier QMS Crown
printer. This reorganization takes time. Don’t interrupt the reor-
ganization, because all files on the disk might be lost.
Administration/Disk Operations/Install Option
The Install Option command is used to add options, such as fonts
and emulations, to the hard disk. See “Installing an Optional Card
Font or Emulation” in chapter 8 for more details.
Administration/Disk Operations/Remove Option
The Remove Option command is used in removing options
previously installed on the hard disk. Selecting this option removes
all the files that are a part of the option. See “Removingan Optional
Card Font or Emulation” in chapter 8 for more details.
Administration/Disk Operations/Format Disk
The Format Disk command is used to format a hard disk.
If the FORMAT FAILEDmessage displays in themessagewindow
during the Format Disk operation, the disk cannot be used. Press
the Menu key to remove the message and contact your QMS
vendor. See “Formatting the Internal Hard Disk” and “Formatting
an External Hard Disk” in chapter 8 for more details.
Administration/Disk Operations/Spool Overflow
The Spool Overflow submenu allows you to specify which disk
and how much disk space is to be used to spool print jobs when the
job cannot be accommodated by RAM. Memory for spool buffers
is defined in the K Mem for Spool menu option (in the
Administration/Memory menu, which is explained earlier in this
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
chapter). The printer must be turned off and on again for the new
value to take effect.
Size (Meg)
Use this option to choose the number of megabytes of
disk spaceallocated (inadditiontoRAM)tospoolprint
job data. Values range from 0 to 256 with a default of
10 MB.
Location
Use this option to specify which disk to use for
temporary spooling storage when an additional hard
disk is available. The choices are DSK0 through DSK6
(the internal hard disk, the default).
Administration/Disk Operations/Collation
The Collation submenu allows you to specify which disk and how
much of that disk should be used to store collated print jobs when
the jobs can’t be accommodated by RAM. Collation is selected in
the Operator Control/Collation menu (described earlier in this
chapter). Turn the printer off and back on again for the value to
take effect. (See “Collating” in chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily
Operations” for more details.)
Size (Meg)
Use this option to choose the number of megabytes of
disk space allocated (in addition to RAM) on which to
store collated print jobs. Ten megabytes of collation
disk space is probably sufficient for most printing
applications. Values range from 00 to 50 with a default
of 10 MB.
Location
Use this option to specify which disk to use for
temporary storage of collated jobs when an additional
hard disk is available. The choices are DSK0 through
DSK6 (the internal hard disk, the default).
The Optional Features Menus
If you install a printer option (for example, a network interface
card), it may affect printer configuration and the Configuration
4 - 5 4
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
menu. Depending on what option you install, you may have new
menus and options in the Configuration menu, which allow you to
control the new option. See the documentation accompanying your
option to learn exactly how it affects the Configuration menu.
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Document Option Commands
Your printer offers a wide range of capabilities for designing and
printing documents. However, applications and printer emulations
differ in their ability to access some of these document printing
capabilities. Document Option Commands (DOCs) provide a way
to access printer features that cannot be accessed by your
application or your printer emulations.
System administratorscanuseDOCsalong with the host’snetwork
management software to generate personalized header pages for
custom print queues or to activate special printer features for each
user.
Following is a list of DOCs supported by the QMS magicolor LX
printer. For more informationonthesecommands,see QMS Crown
Document Option Commands, an optional manual available from
your QMS vendor.
Header/Trailer Page Commands
Header pages
Trailer pages
%%IncludeFeature: header
%%IncludeFeature: trailer
Header/Trailer Information Commands
Application used
Copyright statement
Current date
%%Creator:
%%CopyRight:
%%Date:
Date and time created
Host computer
Owner
%%CreationDate:
%%Host:
%%For:
Routing information
Title
%%Routing:
%%Title:
Version and revision
%%Version:
4 - 5 6
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
HP-GL Emulation Features Commands
Enhanced mode
Expanding plots
Original paper size
Pen width and color selection
Plotter selection
Reverse image
%%IncludeFeature: enhanced
%%IncludeFeature: expand
%%IncludeFeature: size
%%IncludeFeature: pen
%%IncludeFeature: plotter
%%IncludeFeature: reverse
%%IncludeFeature: scaling
%%IncludeFeature: origin
Scaling plots
Shifting origin
HP-PCL Emulation Features Commands
Carriage returns*
Font selection*
Font by id*
%%IncludeFeature: criscrlf
%%IncludeFeature: font
%%IncludeFeature: fontid
Font storage*
Line feeds*
Lines per inch*
Point size*
Remove from disk*
Reset to defaults
Symbol set*
%%IncludeFeature: resource
%%IncludeFeature: lfiscrlf
%%IncludeFeature: linesperinch
%%IncludeFeature: pointsize
%%IncludeFeature: remove
%%IncludeFeature: reset
%%IncludeFeature: symbolset
Retain temporary macros/fonts %%IncludeFeature:retaintemporary
Select monochrome
Enable scalable fonts*
%%IncludeFeature:monochromegl
%%IncludeFeature:scalablefonts
Establish resource/def. object ID* %%IncludeFeature:install
*Indicates a DOC about which updated information is provided in
appendix D, “Additional Technical Information.”
Lineprinter Emulation Features Commands
Automatic text wrap
Carriage returns
Font selection
Form feed
Line feeds
Lines per page
%%IncludeFeature: autowrap
%%IncludeFeature: criscrlf
%%IncludeFeature: font
%%IncludeFeature: ffiscrff
%%IncludeFeature: lfiscrlf
%%IncludeFeature: linesperpage
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
4 - 5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Map using ASCII or EBCDIC
Margins
%%IncludeFeature: map
%%IncludeFeature: lpmargins
Number on for 5-digit numbers %%IncludeFeature: number
Orientation
Point size
Tabs selection
%%IncludeFeature: lporientation
%%IncludeFeature: pointsize
%%IncludeFeature: tabs
PostScript Emulation Features Commands
Choose Level 1 or 2
Default dither pattern
%%IncludeFeature: languagelevel
%%IncludeFeature: ditherdefault
Printer Features Commands
Collating print jobs
Color model selection
Color separations
Copies, number of
Emulation selection
Media type selection
Orientation selection
Paper selection
%%IncludeFeature: collate
%%IncludeFeature: colormodel
%%IncludeFeature: colorseparation
%%IncludeFeature: numcopies
%%IncludeFeature: emulation
%%IncludeFeature: mediatype
%%IncludeFeature: orientation
%%IncludeFeature: input
Output tray selection
Resolution selection
%%IncludeFeature: output
%%IncludeFeature: resolution
♦
4 - 5 8
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Introduction
This chapter covers print media handling, printing, and other daily
printing operations.
Refilling the Media Cassette
This section explains how to refill the paper cassette.
Tosee illustrationsofthesteps describedin this section, seechapter
2, “Initial Printer Setup.”
1. Pull the paper cassette out of the printer.
2. Make sure the cassette size key (the slide on the back end of
the cassette) is set for the media size that you’re loading (fig.
5.1).
EX LT A4 LG
Fig. 5.1 Set the Cassette Size Key
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
3. From the wrapping, determine which is the printing side of
the media; then remove a stack of media 1" (approx. 27 mm)
or less.
If you’re using paper, fan it to prevent the sheets from sticking
together. (Don’t fan transparencies or labels because this can
cause jams.)
4. Align the edges of the stack on a flat surface and load it in the
cassette so the top edge will lead into the printer and the
printing side is up.
You can load up to 250 sheets of paper or 50 transparencies.
Label stock varies in thickness; just make sure it does not
exceed the upper-limit load mark on the cassette.
5. Adjust the paper guides on each side of the media so that they
rest lightly against it without causing it to buckle.
6. Slide the filled cassette into the printer until it is flush with the
front of the printer.
NOTE: Make sure the printer is configured for the media type
(paper or transparency) you have in the cassette or print
quality could degrade. Media type can be selected
through the printer’s front panel.
5 - 2
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Manual Feed
You can feed a single sheet at a time to the printer using the
manual-feed tray. This allows you to print ona differentmedia type
without changing the media in the cassette, or to print on media not
supported by the standard cassette (envelopes or thick stock).
1. Use your application’s print setup feature to select the
manual-feed tray and the media type you plan to use (paper
or transparency).
If your application doesn’t allow this, you can do it at the
printer front panel:
a. Press the Tray Select key until the Manual Feed LED is lit.
b. Press the Media key until the LED for the media type you want
(paper or transparency) is lit. (Choose the Paper setting for label
and envelope printing.)
If you’re printing on thick stock (paper that’s between 24 and
43 lb [90 g/m2 and 163 g/m2]), then use the Operator
Control/Media menu to select this media type.
NOTE: If you select media type from the driver, the tray you’re
printing to must already have been set from the printer’s
front panel for the desired media type.
2. Use your application’s print setup feature to select any other
printing options you want.
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
3. Open the manual-feed tray by lightly pressing on the top-right
corner to release the spring latch (fig. 5.2) and then tilting the
tray out and down.
Fig. 5.2 Open the Manual Feed Tray
4. Move the paper guides on the manual feed tray to fit the size
of the chosen media.
5. Determine the printing side of the media (an arrow on the
media wrapping should point to the printing side). Make sure
the media is in good condition, free of folds, tears, and
wrinkles.
5 - 4
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
6. Insert a single sheet of media, printing side up, with the top
edge leading into the printer, in the manual feed tray (fig. 5.3)
until it reaches the rear of the tray inside the printer and lies
flat.
If you’re printing envelopes, load the envelopes printing-side
up, so that the flap side will be on the left when the envelope
is pulled into the printer.
Fig. 5.3 Insert a Single Sheet
7. Through your application, print your document.
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Printing Transparencies
1. See “Refilling the Media Cassette” or “Manual Feed,” earlier
in this chapter, for information on loading media.
2. If you haven’t previously, set up the tray you want to use for
transparency printing:
a. At the printer front panel, press the Online/Offline key.
b. Press the Tray Select key until the LED for tray you want to use
for transparencies is lit on the front panel.
c. Press the Media key until the Transparency LED is lit on the
front panel.
d. Press the Online/Offline key.
3. Use your application’s print setup feature to select
Transparency printing, and select any other printing options
you want.
Ifyou’reprinting from aWindowsoraMacintosh application,
you can select transparency printing from your application if
you use the QMS-supplied Windows orMacintosh driver. See
chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer,” for information on
installing the driver. Then, in the driver, select Overhead from
the QCOLOR setup options to print from the tray you set up for
transparencies. (YoucanselectanyoftheQCOLOR colorsetup
options for transparency printing if you select the
Transparency option in the Color Setup dialog box in the
Windows driver—or, in the Macintosh driver, select
Transparency from the Media listbox—without changing any
other options. If you do this, the Customize option will appear
in the QCOLOR setup listbox.)
NOTE: Any time you select a media type from the driver, the tray
you’re printing to must already have been set from the
front panel for the desired media type.
5 - 6
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
4. Send your job.
Printing Labels
For best results when printing labels, format labels through your
application and then run a test print on plain paper to check
formatting and avoid wasting label sheets.
1. See “Refilling the Media Cassette” or “Manual Feed,” earlier
in this chapter, for information on loading media in the
cassette. Make sure you place the labels printing-side up with
the top edge feeding into the printer first.
2. If you haven’t previously, set up the tray you want to use for
printing on Paper:
a. At the printer front panel, press the Online/Offline key.
b. Press the Tray Select key until the LED for tray you want to use
for labels is lit on the front panel.
c. Press the Media key until the Paper LED is lit on the front panel.
d. Press the Online/Offline key.
3. Use your application’s print setup feature to select Paper
printing and any other printing options you want.
NOTE: Any time you select a media type from the driver, the tray
you’re printing to must already have been set from the
front panel for the desired media type.
4. Send your job.
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Printing on Letterhead or Other Preprinted
Media
Print letterhead or other preprinted media the same way labels are
printed. Make sure you place the media printing-side up with the
letterhead edge feeding into the printer first.
Printing on 3-Hole or Other Pre-punched
Media
Print 3-hole or other pre-punched media the same way labels are
printed. Make sure you place the media printing-side up with the
top edge feeding into the printer first.
Printing Envelopes
Envelopes can be printed from the manual-feed tray or from the
optional envelope cassette. If you purchased the optional envelope
cassette for your printer, see “Using the Envelope Cassette” in
chapter 8, “Printer Options.”
To print envelopes from the manual-feed tray, see “Manual Feed,”
earlier in this chapter. Envelopes are loaded with the printing side
up, so that the top of the envelope (the flap side) is on the left as
the envelope is pulled into the printer.
Printing on Thick Paper Stocks
To print on heavy paper stocks (between 24 and 43 lb [90 g/m2 and
163 g/m2]
1. Set up the manual-feed tray for printing thick stock:
5 - 8
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
a. Press the Online/Offline key to take the printer off line. (The
Online/Offline LED goes out and IDLEappears in the message
window.)
b. Press the Menu key to enter the Configuration menu. Then press
the Next key until the following message displays:
CONFIGURATION
OPERATOR CONTROL
c. Press the Select key to choose the Operator Control menu. Then,
press the Next key until the following message displays:
OPERATOR CONTROL
MEDIA
d. Press theSelect keytoenter theMedia menu;thenpress theNext
key until the following message displays:
MEDIA
FOR MANUAL BIN
e. Press the Select key to enter the Manual Bin menu; then press
the Next key until Thick Stock appears in the message window:
FOR MANUAL BIN
THICK STOCK
f. Press the Select key to choose Thick Stock.
g. Press the Online/Offline key to exit the Configuration menu or
press the Menu key to back out of the Configuration menu one
level at a time. The message window displays
SAVE CHANGES?
*NO
h. Press the Next key until Yes appears in the message window;
then press the Select key. The following message displays
OFFLINE
i. Press the Online/Offline key to put the printer back on line. (The
Online LED lights.)
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
2. See “Manual Feed,” earlier in this chapter, for instructions on
feeding media manually to the printer.
Page Sizes, Imageable Regions and Margins
Page Sizes
Your printer can print on the following media sizes: letter, legal,
executive, A4, and envelopes (DL and COM 10). (Appendix B,
“Technical Specifications,” lists measurements for each of these
sizes.)
Imageable Regions and Margins
Each size has a certain imageable region—the maximum page area
the printer can print on. The imageable region is subject to
hardware limits (physical page size and margins required by the
printer engine) and to software constraints (amount of printer
memory available). As you set page margins in your application,
remember that they must be equal to or fall inside the printer’s
imageable region for the page size you’re using. (Appendix B,
“Technical Specifications,” lists measurements of imageable
regions and margins for each media size.)
About Legal-Sized Imageable Region
There are two imageable regions for legal-sized pages: one for
black and one for color. The imageable region for black on
legal-sized pages is 8.11" x 13.61" (205.90 mm x 345.60 mm). The
imageable region for color on legal-sized pages is an 8.11" x 11.7"
(205.90 mm x 297.18 mm) region at the top of the page. We
recommend that you compose color legal-sized pages so that color
images stay in this 8.11" x 11.7" area near the top of the page, and
use the imageable region below this for black only.
5 - 1 0
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Working Within Imageable Regions and Margins
If you experience problems withyourfilebeingcut off(notprinting
to the expected margins), it might be due to an imageable region
constraint. There are two ways to compensate for imageable region
constraints:
1. Adjust margins, page size, or scale through your application.
2. Use the PostScript translate and scale operators to reduce
image size and change its placement on the page. The QMS
Crown Technical Reference (an optional manual available
from your QMS vendor) contains information on using
PostScript operators.
Selecting and Storing Media
Media Selection
Media versatility is one of the biggest benefits of the QMS
magicolor LX printer. It can print on plain or laser paper,
transparencies, labels, envelopes and thicker stocks (between 24
and 43 lb [90 g/m2 and 163 g/m2].
Make sure that the media you select meets the specifications listed
in the “Media Handling” section of appendix B, “Technical
Specifications.”
Media Storage
Store media according to the manufacturer’s instructions to
optimize printer output and decrease the chance of jams during
printing. See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for
additional media storage recommendations.
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Collating
Collating means printing multiple copies of a job in numeric order.
The printer can deliver multiple copies of your files in collated
order to the top cover. Figure 5.4 illustrates collated and uncollated
stacking for two copies of a four-page file. You can select collating
through your application, if its driver supports this option (such as
the QMS-provided Macintosh or Windows driver), or through the
printer front panel (see chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for
information).
Fig. 5.4 Collated and Uncollated Output
Configuring the Printer for Collation
Since a hard disk is already installed, using the hard disk for
collation instead of system RAM greatly improves performance.
To specify which disk and how much of that disk should be used
for storing collated print jobs, use the Administration/Disk
Operations/Collation menu.
5 - 1 2
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Theincreased disk spaceallowsmorecomplexandlongercollation
sequences. However, there’s a limit on how much can be collated
at one time. When 100 sheets are received for a print job, or when
a complex print jobs consumes all the collation disk space, chunk
collation occurs.
Chunk collation breaks a print job into smaller, more manageable
collation sections. For example in figure 5.5, copies “a” and “b” of
each collation section must be manually combined to create one
collated print job.
Fig. 5.5 Chunk Collation
The main advantages of collation are user convenience and time
saved from not having to separate and sort individual copies of a
print job. Each copy exists as a whole unless chunk collation
occurs. If you print multiple jobs and choose collating, you may
want to add header and trailer pages to separate the jobs. (See the
“Administration/Special Pages” section in chapter 4 for details on
how to print header and trailer pages.)
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Changing Print Job Resolution
You can configure the printer to use either 600 or 300 dpi
resolution. This can be done through your application, if its driver
supports this option (such as the QMS-provided Macintosh or
Windows driver), or through the printer front panel (see chapter 4,
“Printer Configuration,” for information).
If you purchased a printer with 12 MB RAM, you can print color
or monochrome documents in 300 dpi or monochrome documents
in 600 dpi. To print monochrome documents in 600 dpi with 12
MB RAM, in addition to configuring the printer for 600 dpi
resolution, you must also configure it for monochrome printing.
This can be done through your application or through the printer
front panel (Administration/Engine/Default Resolution and
Operator Control/Color Model menus).
To print color documents in 600 dpi, you must install additional
RAM in the printer. See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,”
for specific information on RAM requirements and color
resolution.
5 - 1 4
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Adjusting Print Density
Normally, your laser printer produces a rich black or color image.
However, you may occasionally notice a color is printing a bit light
or dark. In this case, you may want to increase the print density (or
contrast) setting for that color.
NOTE: Changing the print density affects the resident color
management system and should be done only as a last
step to improve print quality. The normal setting is the
center position.
Each toner color has its own adjustment dial, so you can adjust
colors individually. To change density settings, use the following
procedure:
1. Remove the top cover by lifting it up and out. Then, set the
cover aside for now.
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
2. Locate the adjustment dials inside the printer to the front left
(fig. 5.6).
K
C
M
Y
Fig. 5.6 Print Density Adjustment Dials
3. Turnthe density adjustment dialtothe left(counterclockwise)
to lighten the print or to the right (clockwise) to darken the
print.
5 - 1 6
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs
The Cancel key allows you to cancel the “oldest” job(s) compiling
or printing in the printer, or to send an end-of-job indicator for a
print job.
NOTE: If you accidentally press the Cancel key, press the Menu
key to tell the printer to stop cancelling a job.
Cancelling a Print Job
To cancel a job currently printing or compiling data, use the
following procedure:
1. Press the Cancel key. The following message displays in the
message window:
CANCELLING JOB?
YES
2. Press the Select or Cancel key to confirm your choice. The
message
YES
IS SELECTED
displays briefly. Then
CANCELLING JOB
displays until the job currently printing or compiling data is
removed from the printer.
Sending an End-of-Job Indicator
To send an end-of-job indicator to the currently compiling job if
WAITING FOR INPUT
END JOB?
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
displays in the message window, use the following procedure:
NOTE: Selecting End Job won’t end a job that is still receiving
data.Itsonlypurposeistoprovideanend-of-jobindicator
for jobs that do not have one.
1. Press the Cancel key. The following message displays in the
message window:
CANCELLING JOB?
YES
2. Press the Next key. The following message displays:
CANCELLING JOB?
END JOB
3. Press the Select or Cancel key to confirm that jobs waiting for
input are ended.
5 - 1 8
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Diagnostic and Special Pages
There may be times when you want to check the current status of
your printer, adjust the quality of your printed copy, or monitor
print jobs. To help you do this, the printer has several types of
diagnosticandspecialpages.Theseincludethestart-uppage, status
pages (standard and advanced), the registration, and sample pages,
and the header and trailer pages.
The Start-up Page
When you turn on your printer a start-up page prints in
approximately 4 minutes (unless you disable this feature). This
page gives the following information about the printer:
■ The printer name
■ The PostScript Level 2 emulation version number
■ The firmware revision number
■ The interface port settings (emulation, communication
protocols)
■ The number of typefaces stored in the printer
■ The number of pages printed to date
■ The amount of resident RAM
■ The printer name (user-definable through PS Executive
Series Utilities)
■ A color block for each of the process colors
■ The current halftone selected
■ The highest possible resolution (for monochrome and
four-color jobs) that can be printed on the currently
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
selected page size with the amount of printer RAM
currently installed
Disabling the Start-up Page
After you install the printer and establish communication between
the printer and the host, you may want to disable the start-up page
to conserve toner, developer, and print media. You can do this
through the printer front panel (see chapter 4, “Printer
Configuration”) or through PS Executive Series Utilities (see the
on-line help).
The Status Pages
There are twotypes of statuspages, thestandardstatus page (1page
that gives the general setup), and the advanced status page (5 or
more pages that lists all menu settings and fonts and emulations).
You select the type (standard or advanced) to print through the
Administration/Special Pages/Status Page Type menu. Then, you
can print the selected type through the front panel
Administration/Special Pages/Print Status menu. (See chapter 4,
“Printer Configuration,” for details on printing from the front
panel.)
The standard status page lists printer identification informationand
settings, current memory configuration, timeout values,
communication settings, input buffer sizes, and the hard disk(s)
status.
The standard status page also has alignment tickmarks in the
lower-leftcorner. When the printer is properlyaligned, these marks
are 0.5" from the left edge and 0.5" from the bottom of the page.
Use the Image Alignment option (located in the
Administration/Engine menu), described in chapter 4, “Printer
5 - 2 0
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Configuration,” to change the placement of images on the page if
necessary.
The advanced status page has the same information as the standard
status page, plus it lists configuration menu settings, fonts, and
loadable emulations.
NOTE: The sizes listed on the status pages are in bytes, so you
must divide the numbers on the status pages by 1024 to
get the equivalent number of kilobytes entered through
the front panel.
The Sample Page
You can print a sample page through the front panel
Administration/Special Pages menu. This page lists the current
default halftone settings for the printer, and allows you to see the
effect of the currently selected default halftone on shades of cyan,
magenta, yellow, black, blue and green.
The Registration Page
You can print a registration page through the front panel
Administration/SpecialPages menu. This page allowsyou tocheck
color registration (placement of each of the process colors on the
page). You also can print a registration page through PS Executive
Series Utilities. See the utilities on-line documentation for more
details, and see chapter 9, “Troubleshooting,” for information on
troubleshooting registration problems.
Header and Trailer Pages
Header and trailer pages help you monitor individual jobs. Think
of them as an accounting or tracking system.
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
5 - 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
For example,theheader (orbanner page)containsthe printername,
selectedinterface, jobidentification,title, submittingcomputer,job
owner, routing message, start time/date, application used, creation
time/date, copyright date, versionnumber,jobsubmission time,job
start time, and printer product name/logo.
You can enable a header page through the front panel
Administration/Special Pages/Header Page menu. See chapter 4
for details.
Trailer pages contain the printer’s name, selected interface, job
identification, title, submitting computer, job owner, routing
message, start time/date, application used, creation time/date,
copyright date, version number, jobsubmissiontime,job starttime,
job finish time, number of sheets printed, and printer product
name/logo. The trailer page also lists any printer errors generated
while processing or printing your document.
You can enable a trailer page through the Administration/Special
Pages/Trailer Page menu. See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,”
for details.
♦
5 - 2 2
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Introduction
This chapter covers storing and replacing major consumables and
performing preventative maintenance on your printer.
Storing and Handling Consumables
This section covers storing and handling the major consumables
for your printer except for print media. Print media is covered in
chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily Operations.”
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Storing Consumables
Table 6.1 covers storage specifications for toner, developer, and
OPC belt cartridges.
Storage Specifications
Toner, Developer, and OPC Belt Cartridges
Characteristic Normal Conditions*
Severe Conditions**
Temperature
Humidity
32˚ to 95˚ F (0˚ to 35˚ C)
10-80% RH
Low 14˚ to 32˚ F (-10˚ to 0˚ C)
High 95˚ to 104˚ F (35˚ to 40˚ C)
80-90% RH
Period of
Storage
2 years after production date (includes operation life)
Storage
Conditions
Unopened in a cool, dry, well-ventilated, dark place.
Away from direct sunlight, corrosive gases, and solvents
(alcohol, thinner, diazole).
Away from liquids.
* More than 90% of the entire storage period.
** Less than 10% of the entire storage period; 48 continuous hours at most
during any one period.
Tab. 6.1 Storage Specifications for Cartridges
Handling Consumables
The following list covers handling the consumables for your
printer.
WARNING!
Toner and developer are highly combustible;
never burn them. Also, avoid inhaling loose powder or getting
it around your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye
irritation.
6 - 2
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
ACHTUNG!
Bei Entwickler und Toner handelt es sich um
gefährliche Pulver, die leicht entzündlich sind; sie dürfen
deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen.
Einatmen oder Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls
zu vermeiden, da dieses zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege,
Haut- oder Augenreizungen führen könnte.
Handling Conditions
Toner and
Developer
Cartridges
Dispose of toner and developer in a safe manner,
meeting all local and federal regulations.
Handle only one color of toner and developer at a time
to avoid contaminating other colors.
Use a toner vacuum to clean up powder spills in the
printer, if necessary.
If toner gets on your hands or clothing, lightly dust off
as much as possible. If some remains, rinse your hands
or washable clothing with cool water (hot water sets
toner) to remove the rest.
OPC Belt
Cartridge
Do not touch the belt with your hands; hold the
cartridge by its green end-handle or the two green
side-handles.
Do not expose the belt to direct sunlight.
Do not expose the belt to room light for longer than 2
minutes.
Keep the belt surface free of foreign material, such as
dust, solvents, moisture, or corrosives.
Avoid abrupt changes of temperature and humidity for
the cartridge.
Keep exposure to casual light to a minimum; for
example, remove the top cover of the printeronly when
necessary and replace the cover as soon as possible.
Reinstall the pressure release and tension release pin
sets (one on the left side and one on the right) in the
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
cartridge if it will be out of the printer for any extended
time period. These pins protect and relieve tension on
the belt and cleaning blade.
Replacing Consumables
This section explains how to replace the consumables, including
toner, developer, OPC belt cartridges, cleaning pad, oil bottle, and
waste toner pack. If you want to see illustrations of all the steps
described in this section on replacing consumables, see chapter 2,
“Initial Printer Setup.”
NOTE: When you see status messages, including those regarding
consumables, you do not have to turn off the printer
unless the message calls for service intervention.
Replacing a Toner Cartridge
This section covers replacing a toner cartridge in your printer. You
should replace a toner cartridge when the x TONER EMPTY
message displays in the message window on the control panel. The
x represents the color of the empty toner cartridge.
The industry standard for toner measurement is quoted at 5%
coverage for letter- or A4-size media.
NOTE: Occasionally, you may see the x TONER EMPTY
message when there is still toner in the cartridge, but the
toner has merely settled so it can’t distribute evenly. This
may happen if the printer sits without use for over several
days.If you thinkthis maybe thecase,removethecurrent
cartridge, shake it horizontally to redistribute the toner,
and place the cartridge back in the printer. Then, run a
6 - 4
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
test file for that color to see if it prints correctly. This
procedure can extend the life of your cartridges.
To replace a toner cartridge, use the following procedure:
1. Remove the top cover (fig. 2.5).
WARNING!
The toner is a highly combustible powder; never
burn it. Also, avoid inhaling loose toner or getting it around
your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation.
ACHTUNG!
Bei dem Toner handelt es sich um ein gefähr-
liches und leicht entzündliches Pulver; es darf deshalb niemals
mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen. Einatmen oder
Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden, da
dies zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege, Haut- oder Augen-
reizungen führen könnte.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
2. Remove the old toner cartridge by holding it across the center,
squeezing the sides to loosen the pins on the back side from
the developer cartridge notches. Then, lift the toner cartridge
straight up and out of the printer (fig. 6.1), and dispose of it
following safety laws and regulations.
Fig. 6.1 Remove the Old Toner Cartridge
3. Remove the new toner cartridge from its protective bag.
(Toner cartridges are color-coded on the top. Be sureyouhave
the correct color cartridge.)
4. Hold the cartridge by the ends, and shake it horizontally (fig.
2.10). This distributes toner evenly inside the cartridge and
helps assure quality printing.
5. Hold and squeeze the toner cartridge across the center, and
alignit withthedevelopercartridgeofthecorrespondingcolor
(fig. 2.11). Make sure the toner cartridge’s color-coded pins
line up with the notches on the developer cartridge.
6 - 6
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
CAUTION: Neverforcea tonercartridgeonto thewrongdeveloper
cartridge. This can damage the cartridges and the printer.
6. Lower the toner cartridge until it fits firmly onto the notches
on the developer cartridge.
7. Press the top of the toner cartridge until it snaps into place
under the two securing latches.
8. Grasp the tab on the top of the toner cartridge.
9. Holding the toner cartridge in place, pull the tab and attached
clear tape straight up and completely out of the cartridge (fig.
2.12). Then discard the tape.
10. Set the print density dial (fig. 5.6) for the changed toner
cartridge in the center if necessary.
11. Replace the printer’s top cover.
Replacing a Developer Cartridge
A message on the control panel window, X DEV LOWindicates
when it is time to change a developer cartridge. The x indicates
which color should be changed. Cyan, yellow, and magenta
developer cartridges last for approximately 15,000 pages, and
black developer cartridges last for approximately 30,000 pages.
NOTE: The industry standard for developer measurement is
quoted at 5% coverage for letter- or A4-size media.
To replace a developer cartridge, use the following procedure:
1. Remove the printer’s top cover (fig. 2.5).
2. Remove the toner cartridge by holding it across the center,
squeezing the sides to loosen the pins on the back side from
the developer cartridge notches (fig. 6.1). Then, lift the toner
cartridge straight up and out of the printer.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
3. Set the toner cartridge aside for now, being careful to keep it
level. Also, be sure to place it on something, such as a large
sheet of paper, to catch loose residue.
4. Grasp the green latches at each end of the used developer
cartridge and raise them straight up to open them.
5. Release the developer cartridge from its securing latches by
pressing back on the latches while pulling forward on the
cartridge (fig. 6.2). The securing latches are color coded
(black, cyan, magenta, or yellow) to the color of the developer
cartridge.
Fig. 6.2 Release the Developer Cartridge
6. Holding the developer cartridge by the green end-latches,
gently lift it straight up and out of the printer, being careful
not to spill any of the developer material. Then, discard the
cartridge following safety laws and regulations.
WARNING!
The developer is a highly combustible powder;
never burn it. Also, avoid inhaling loose developer or getting it
6 - 8
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
around your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye
irritation.
ACHTUNG!
Bei dem Entwickler handelt es sich um ein ge-
fährliches und leicht entzündliches Pulver; es darf deshalb
niemals mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen. Einatmen
oder Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu ver-
meiden, da dies zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege, Haut-
oder Augenreizungen führen könnte.
7. Remove the new developer cartridge from its protective bag.
8. Grasp the green latches at each end of the new developer
cartridge and raise them straight up to open them.
9. Holding the new developer cartridge by the green latches,
gently lower it into the empty slot until it is securely in place
(fig. 2.7).
10. Close the cartridge latches by pushing them down (fig. 2.8).
11. Grasp the green tab attached to the top of the developer
cartridge. Then, pull the tab and attached clear tape straight
up and out of the cartridge, and discard it (fig. 2.9).
12. Replace the toner cartridge that you removed in step 2.
13. Replace the printer’s top cover.
14. Clear the x DEV LOWmessage through the control panel
using the Administration/Engine/Clear Warning menu. See
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for details on using the
control panel.
Replacing the OPC Belt Cartridge
This section covers replacing the OPC (Organic Photoconductor)
belt cartridge in your printer. See “How Your Printer Works” in
appendix D for details on what part the OPC belt plays in printing.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
A message on the control panel window, REPLACE BELT,
indicates when it is time to change the OPC belt cartridge. This
cartridge should be replaced every 50,000 planes or 12 months,
whichever comes first. (A plane is a pass of the OPC belt for one
color, so a one-color page makes one pass, a two-color page makes
two passes, and so forth.) Changing the belt ona regular basis helps
prevent the print quality from deteriorating.
NOTE: You may want to clean the paper guide and the register
and paper exit rollers at this time also. They should be
cleaned every 20,000 copies or 12 months, whichever
comes first. The procedures for cleaning these parts are
given later in this chapter.
Illustrations for many of the steps described in this section on
replacing the OPC belt cartridge are in chapter 2, “Initial Printer
Setup.”
To replace the OPC cartridge, use the following procedure:
1. Open the manual feed tray.
2. Lift the handle of the old OPC belt cartridge up to unlock it.
3. Pull the cartridge straight out of the printer, and discard it.
CAUTION: The OPC belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights
and direct sunlight. Do not remove the new cartridge from its
protective bag until you are ready to install it. Limit exposure to
800 lux (the average fluorescent lighting in an office) of light to
under 2 minutes. If exposure exceeds this, put the belt in a dark
place to recover; depending on exposure, recovery may take up to
2 hours.
Also, handle the belt cartridge carefully by either the two green
side-handles or by the green end-handle. The belt is extremely
6 - 1 0
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
sensitive to hand oils and scratches, both of which reduce print
quality.
4. Remove the new OPC belt cartridge from its protective bag.
5. Remove the pressure release and tension release pin sets (one
set on the left and one on theright)fromtheOPC beltcartridge
by pulling them straight out (fig. 2.25).
NOTE: These pins protect the belt and cleaning blade in the
OPC belt cartridge by relieving tension during shipment or if
the belt is out of the printer longer than a few hours.
6. Make sure the green end-handle on the cartridge is turned up
(unlocked).
7. Slide the cartridge approximately three-quarters of the way
into the printer until the notches on each side of the bottom
rest on the lip of the manual feed tray (fig. 2.26).
8. Remove the black light-shield paper from the OPC belt by
grasping the tab on the front and pulling the paper straight out
of the printer (fig. 2.27).
9. Holding the cartridge by the green handle, firmly slide it the
rest of the way into the printer until it snaps into place. It is in
place when you can see the green arrows inside the metal
frame of the printer.
10. Turn the green handle on the OPC belt cartridge down to lock
the cartridge in place.
11. Close the manual feed tray.
12. Clear the REPLACE BELT status message through the
controlpanelusingtheAdministration/Engine/ClearWarning
menu. See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for details on
using the control panel.
This completes the steps for replacing the OPC belt cartridge.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Replacing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle
This section covers replacing the cleaning pad and oil bottle in your
printer. The cleaning pad removes printing debris (such as excess
toner and paper dust) from the fusing unit. The oil helps prevent
toner from sticking to the fuser rollers.
Replace the oil bottle and cleaning pad when FUSER OIL LOW
or OUT OF OILappears in the printer’s message window. The
first oil bottle and cleaning pad change is required atapproximately
1,500 pages. After that, changes are required at approximately
3,000-page intervals. Changingtheseona regular basis helps retain
optimal print quality.
Illustrations for many of the steps described in this section are in
chapter 2, “Initial Printer Setup.”
To replace the cleaning pad and oil bottle
1. Turn off the main power switch on the back of the printer.
2. Remove the top cover (fig. 2.5).
3. Pull up on the paper exit unit latch and then tilt the unit back
to open it (fig. 2.13).
4. Pull back the two latches (one on each side) of the separator
pawl unit to unlock it; then tilt the pawl unit back towards the
paper exit unit (fig. 2.14).
WARNING!
The fuser unit can become extremely hot and
cause severe burns. Make sure the unit is cool before handling
it.
ACHTUNG!
Die Fixiereinheit kann sehr heiß werden, so daß
Verbrennungsgefahr besteht. Bitte lassen Sie die Fixiereinheit
einige Zeit abkühlen, bevor Sie diese berühren.
6 - 1 2
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
5. Locate the cleaning pad in the slot above the heat roller. Then,
while carefully avoiding the surface of the fuser unit, which
may be hot, grasp the pad by its center tab (towards the rear
of the unit), pull it out of the printer, and discard it (fig. 6.3).
Fig. 6.3 Remove the Cleaning Pad
6. Removethe newcleaning padand thenewoilbottle fromtheir
protective bags.
7. Holding the new cleaning pad by its center tab (towards the
rear of the unit), align the triangle mark on the pad with the
one on the fusing unit (fig. 2.17).
8. Being careful to avoid any hot surface in the fuser unit, slide
the new pad into the slot above the heat roller. The pad is
correctly positioned when it is centered snugly in the slot.
9. Snap the separator pawl unit closed.
10. Pull open the spring latch on the outer edge of the oil bottle
retainer, and lift the retainer up and toward the center of the
printer (fig. 2.19).
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
NOTE: Normally, a little oil remainsinthe fuser slot in which
the oil bottle rests, and the spout of the oil bottle has a seal to
prevent oil from spilling while you remove or install a bottle
on the pin in the fuser slot. However, if oil accidentally spills
beyondthatslot,usea clean,dry, lint-freecloth orsome cotton
swabs to wipe up the excess.
11. Grasp the top tab on the oil bottle, then lift the bottle out of
the printer, and discard it.
NOTE: If you are replacing an oil bottle after a move, remove
and discard the wadded paper towel from the place normally
occupied by the oil bottle.
12. Hold the new oil bottle, spout end down, bottle label toward
the front of the printer, over its slot in the fuser unit (fig. 2.19).
13. Lower the bottle into place, making sure the spout on the
bottom aligns with the pin in the fuser slot. The bottle is
positioned correctly when it fits snugly into the slot and is
flush with the fuser unit.
14. Close and latch the oil bottle retainer.
15. Close the paper exit unit.
16. Replace the printer’s top cover.
17. Turn on the main power switch.
Replacing the Waste Toner Pack
This section covers replacing the waste toner pack in your printer.
The packcollects excess toner fromthe printingprocess and should
be replaced when the window on the control panel displays the
message CHECK WASTE TONER.
Illustrations for many of the steps described in this section are in
chapter 2, “Initial Printer Setup.”
6 - 1 4
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
To replace the waste toner pack
1. Open the waste toner cover by pushing the cover on the
top-right corner (fig. 2.22).
2. Remove the new waste toner pack from its protective bag and
assemble it according to the instructions accompanying it.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
3. Gently tap the old waste toner pack on its side to settle the
toner down into the pack (fig. 6.4).
Fig. 6.4 Tap the Waste Toner Pack
WARNING!
The toner is a highly combustible powder; never
burn it. Also, avoid inhaling loose toner or getting it around
your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation.
ACHTUNG!
Bei dem Toner handelt es sich um ein gefähr-
liches und leicht entzündliches Pulver; es darf deshalb niemals
mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen. Einatmen oder
Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden, da
dies zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege, Haut- oder Augen-
reizungen führen könnte.
4. Grasp the tab on the top edge of the old waste toner pack, and
pull it out of the printer.
6 - 1 6
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
5. Place the old pack into the empty bag from the new waste
toner pack and dispose of the old one following safety laws
and regulations.
6. Holding the new waste toner pack by the side tab on the top,
insert the pack into the printer until it fits securely. Then, lift
up slightly on the tab to be sure the pack is level and centered
(fig. 6.5).
Fig. 6.5 Lift up on Waste Toner Pack
7. Close the waste toner cover.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Moving the Printer
CAUTION: The printer is heavy: be sure you have help when
moving it. Never lift it by the paper cassette slot, and always lift it
by the four corners that have ridges for a safer, more secure grip.
Be sure to close the manual tray.
If there’s any chance the printer may not remain level or may be
jostled during the move you need to do the following to protect the
printer:
■ Remove the toner and developer cartridges
■ Remove the OPC belt cartridge and reinstall the pressure
release and tension release pin sets in the cartridge
■ Remove the fuser unit and the oil bottle and drain the oil
from the unit.
■ Replace the pressure-release pieces
See the sections on replacing the toner, developer, and OPC belt
cartridges (earlier in this chapter) and the “Removing and
Replacing Pressure-Release Pieces” section (later in this chapter)
for details.
CAUTION: Make sure the OPC belt cartridge is protected while it
is not in the printer. The belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights
and direct sunlight. Limit exposure to 800 lux (the average fluores-
cent lighting in an office) of light to under 2 minutes. If exposure
exceeds this, put the belt in a dark place to recover; depending on
exposure, recovery may take up to 2 hours. Also, handle the OPC
belt cartridge carefully by either the two green side-handles or by
the green handle on the end. The belt is extremely sensitive to hand
oils and scratches, both of which reduce print quality. When you
6 - 1 8
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
must set it down, gently lay it on a clean, lint- and dirt-free surface,
such as on fresh paper.
During the move, store the partially used toner and developer
cartridges in their original shipping bags. If you do not have these
bags, wrap the cartridges in pieces of sturdy cloth or plastic that
cannot be harmed by loose residue. Carefully wrap the OPC belt
cartridge in a piece of dark, heavy cloth and place it in a safe place
where it will not get scratched or damaged.
Removing the Fuser Unit and Oil Bottle
Before you move the printer, you must remove the fuser unit and
the oil bottle and drain the remaining oil from the oil tray. To do
this
1. Turn off the main power switch on the back of the printer.
2. Remove the top cover (fig. 2.5).
3. Pull up on the paper exit unit latch and then tilt the unit back
and down to open it.
WARNING!
The fuser unit can become extremely hot and
cause severe burns. Make sure the unit is cool before handling
it.
ACHTUNG!
Die Fixiereinheit kann sehr heiß werden, so daß
Verbrennungsgefahr besteht. Bitte lassen Sie die Fixiereinheit
einige Zeit abkühlen, bevor Sie diese berühren.
4. Pull open the spring latch on the outer edge of the oil-bottle
retainer, and lift the retainer up and toward the center of the
printer (fig. 2.19).
5. Grasp the top tab on the oil bottle, then lift the bottle out of
the printer. The bottle may leak slightly, so place it in an
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
oil-proof container, such as a plastic bag, until you are ready
to reinstall it after the move.
NOTE: Normally, a little oil remains in the tray in which the
oil bottle rests. If oil accidentally spills beyond this tray into
the printer, use a clean, dry, lint-free cloth or some cotton
swabs to wipe up the excess.
6. Close the oil bottle retainer.
7. Grasp the fuser unit by the two handles, one at each end (fig.
6.6), and lift it up and out of the printer.
Fig. 6.6 Remove the Fuser Unit
6 - 2 0
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
8. Align the fuser unit over an appropriate waste container, such
as an old jar, and tilt the unit so the excess oil pours into the
container (fig. 6.7). Then, dispose of the oil following safety
laws and regulations.
Fig. 6.7 Drain Oil from Fuser Unit
9. Use a clean, dry, lint-free cloth or some cotton swabs to wipe
any remaining oil out of the tray.
10. Replace the fuser unit.
11. Stuff a clean, wadded paper towel into the place normally
occupied by the oil bottle to act as a cushion and to absorb any
residual oil during the move.
12. After the move, see “Replacing the Cleaning Pad and Oil
Bottle,” earlier in this chapter, for instructions on reinstalling
the oil bottle.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Removing and Replacing Pressure-Release Pieces
The pressure-release pieces help relieve the tension on the fuser
rollers to protect the roller from accidental damage during a move
(or prolonged storage). They must be installed for the move and
removed again before printing.
Illustrations of many of the steps described in this section are in
“Removing the Pressure-Release Pieces” in chapter 2, “Initial
Printer Setup.”
Use the following procedure to remove and replace these pieces:
1. Open the paper exit unit by pulling up on the unit latch and
then tilting the unit back and down (fig. 2.13).
2. Open the separator pawl unit by pulling back the two latches
(one on each side) to unlock them and tilting the pawl unit
back in the direction of the paper exit unit (fig. 2.14).
3. Open the pressure-release lever on the end of the fuser unit
(fig. 2.15).
6 - 2 2
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
CAUTION: If you are replacing the pressure-release pieces after
the printer has been running, make sure the fuser unit has cooled.
The fuser gets very hot and can damage these pieces.
4. If you are replacing the two pressure-release pieces (one at
each end of the fuser roller), skip to step 5.
If you are removing the pressure-release pieces, grasp the tab
end of one of the pieces and gently pull it up and out of the
printer(fig. 6.8). Removethepieceattheother endofthefuser
roller in the same manner; then, skip to step 6.
Fig. 6.8 Remove the Pressure-Release Pieces
WARNING!
The fuser unit can become extremely hot and
cause severe burns. Make sure the unit is cool before handling
it.
ACHTUNG!
Die Fixiereinheit kann sehr heiß werden, so daß
Verbrennungsgefahr besteht. Bitte lassen Sie die Fixiereinheit
einige Zeit abkühlen, bevor Sie diese berühren.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
CAUTION: If you are replacing the pressure-release pieces after
the printer has been running, make sure the fuser unit has cooled.
The fuser gets very hot and can damage these pieces.
5. If you are replacing the pressure-release pieces, hold one of
the pieces down close to its base and firmly slide the base
between the fuser rollers on one end (fig. 6.9). Then, repeat
the process with the second pressure-release piece at the other
end of the fuser rollers. When correctly positioned, the pieces
fit snugly between the rollers.
Fig. 6.9 Replace the Pressure-Release Pieces
6. Close the pressure-release lever on the end of the fuser unit.
7. Close the separator pawl unit.
8. Close the paper exit unit.
6 - 2 4
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Preventative Maintenance
Table 6.2, below, shows when preventative maintenance
procedures (described in this chapter) should be performed:
Preventative Maintenance Schedule
At this time...
You should...
Whenever print quality diminishes.
• Clean the Charger Unit.
• Clean the Precharger Unit.
When you have printed 20,000
copies or 12 months have passed
since the last cleaning (whichever
comes first).
• Clean the Register and Transfer
Rollers.
• Clean the Paper Exit Rollers and
Plates.
• Clean the Paper-Feed Rollers and
Manual-Feed Belts.
When a message mentioning a
consumable appears in the control
panel.
• Look up the message in chapter 9,
“Troubleshooting,” and take the
action recommended.
WARNING!
Remove the printer’s power cord from the power
outlet before cleaning or an injury may result.
ACHTUNG!
Ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose
bevor Sie den Drucker reinigen.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
General Tips for Extending Printer Life
■ Do not place anything on the top of the printer.
■ Keep the outputlevels in thetop cover at 150 sheets or less,
depending upon the type of media.
If media stacks too high, you may experience trouble with
paper jams and excessive curl.
■ If you are not going to use the printer for an extended
period of time unplug the power cord from the power
source outlet and close the manual feed tray.
Cleaning the Printer
When cleaning the printer, follow these guidelines:
■ Read all caution and warning labels carefully, making sure
to follow any instructions contained in them.
■ Use a lint-free cloth dampened with a mild general cleaner
on the exterior of the printer; do not use any organic
solvent, such as thinner or benzene, as these can cause
discoloration, alteration, spots on the transfer drum, or
other problems.
■ Use only lint-free paper towels, cloths, or swabs.
■ After cleaning, allow all parts to dry before closing the
printer, reattaching the power cord, and turning on the
power switch.
■ Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced
before reconnecting the power cord and turning on the
printer.
6 - 2 6
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Cleaning the Charger Unit
Clean the charger unit whenever the print quality diminishes. To
clean this unit you need several cotton cloths and swabs, and the
wire cleaner located in the OPC belt tray (see figure 6.11 for
location). To clean the charger unit
1. Open the manual feed tray by lightly pressing on the top-right
corner (fig. 6.10), and then tilt the tray out and down.
Fig. 6.10 Open the Manual Feed Tray
CAUTION: The OPC belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights
and direct sunlight. Limit exposure to 800 lux (the average fluores-
cent lighting in an office) of light to under 2 minutes. If exposure
exceeds this, put the belt in a dark place to recover; depending on
exposure, recovery may take up to 2 hours.
Also, handle the OPC belt carefully, using either the two green
side-handles or using the green end-handle when possible. It is
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
extremely sensitive to hand oils and scratches both of which reduce
print quality. When you must set it down, gently lay it on a clean,
lint- and dirt-free surface, such as on fresh paper for the printer.
2. Lift the OPC belt cartridge handle up to unlock it, and pull the
cartridge straight out of the printer (fig. 6.11).
3. Remove the wire cleaner from the cartridge (fig. 6.11).
Fig. 6.11 Remove the OPC Belt Cartridge
6 - 2 8
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
4. Holding the cartridge by its edges, fold the green end-handle
back down and set the cartridge up on that end. The cartridge
will tilt slightly to one side.
5. Locate the three brass-colored latches, which hold the charger
unit in place. Then, swing each latch to the side to free the
charger unit (fig. 6.12).
6. Grasp the green handle on the end of the charger unit and lift
the unit out of the cartridge (fig. 6.12). Then, place the OPC
belt cartridge in its protective bag or a dark area to protect it
from light and set it aside until you are ready to reinstall it.
Fig. 6.12 Open Charger Unit Brass Latches
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
7. Use clean, dry cotton cloths to gently wipe up any loose toner
from the OPC belt cartridge area in the printer.
8. Clean the charger unit by sliding the wire cleaner along the
groove in the top of the unit several times; then, flip the unit
over and run the wire cleaner several times across the grid
plate (a metal screen) on the bottom (fig. 6.13).
Fig. 6.13 Clean the Charger Unit
9. Turn the OPC belt cartridge up on the handle end again, and
place the charger unit back into its slot.
10. Swing the three brass latches back over the charger unit to
hold it in place.
11. Lift the OPC belt cartridge up and swing the green end-handle
open.
12. Holding the cartridge by its handle, slide it back into the
printer until it snaps in place. The cartridge is in place when
you can see the green arrows inside the metal frame of the
printer.
6 - 3 0
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
13. Push the green end-handle down to lock the cartridge in place.
14. Close the manual feed tray.
Cleaning the Pre-Charger Unit
Clean the pre-charger unit whenever the print quality diminishes.
To clean this unit you need several cotton cloths and swabs, and
the wire cleaner located in the OPC belt tray (see figure 6.11 for
location).
To clean the pre-charger unit
1. Remove the waste toner pack. (See “Replacing the Waste
Toner Pack” in this chapter.) Then, set it aside on a surface
that toner residue can’t hurt, such as on a piece of paper.
WARNING!
The toner is a highly combustible powder; never
burn it. Also, avoid inhaling loose toner or getting it around
your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation.
ACHTUNG!
Bei dem Toner handelt es sich um ein gefähr-
liches und leicht entzündliches Pulver; es darf deshalb niemals
mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen. Einatmen oder
Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden, da
dies zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege, Hautoder Augen-
reizungen führen könnte.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
2. Grasp the end of the pre-charger unit, and pull it downward
and then straight out of the printer (fig. 6.14).
Fig. 6.14 Remove the Pre-Charger from the Printer
6 - 3 2
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
3. Insert the wire cleaner into the recess on the pre-charger unit,
and slide the cleaner back and forth as shown in figure 6.15.
Fig. 6.15 Clean the Pre-Charger Unit
4. Clean the inside corners of the pre-charger unit with cotton
swabs.
5. Making sure the pre-charger unit aligns on the runners inside
the printer, slide it back into the printer.
6. Reinstall the waste toner pack, and close the waste toner
cover.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Cleaning Register and Transfer Rollers
Clean the metal and rubber register rollers and the transfer roller
every 20,000 copies or 12 months, whichever comes first. This is
roughly the same time schedule as replacing the OPC belt cartridge
and cleaning the paper exit rollers, so you may want to do all of
these procedures at the same time.
All you need for this procedure are 2 or 3 pieces of lint-free, cotton
cloth. To clean the rollers
1. Open the back cover by pressing the top-right corner (fig.
6.16).
Fig. 6.16 Open the Back Cover
6 - 3 4
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
2. Open the transfer unit by pulling the green latch handle in the
center toward you and down (fig. 6.17).
Fig. 6.17 Open the Transfer Unit
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
3. Using dry cotton cloths, wipe the metal register roller in the
transfer unit and the rubber register roller in the inner section
of the printer. Then, wipe the transfer roller in the top section
of the transfer unit (fig. 6.18). Rotate this roller to clean all
sides with the cloth to remove paper dust, toner buildup, and
other debris.
Fig. 6.18 Clean the Register Rollers
6 - 3 6
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
4. Close the transfer unit (fig. 6.19).
Fig. 6.19 Close the Transfer Unit
5. Close the back cover.
Cleaning the Paper Exit Rollers and Plates
Clean the paper rollers and plates every 20,000 copies or 12
months, whichever comes first. This is roughly the same time
schedule as replacing the OPC belt cartridge and cleaning the
register and transfer rollers, so you may want to do all of these
procedures now too.
All you need for this procedure are 2 or 3 pieces of dry, lint-free,
cotton cloth. To clean the paper exit roller
1. Open the paper exit unit (fig 2.13).
2. Use a dry, lint-free, cotton cloth and gentle pressure to clean
the paper exit rollers and plates (fig. 6.20). Turn the coupling
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
gear on the left end of the fuser unit to access all sides of the
rollers.
Fig. 6.20 Clean the Fuser Exit Rollers
3. Close the paper exit unit.
Cleaning the Paper-Feed Roller and the Manual-
Feed Belts
Clean the paper-feed roller and the manual-feed belts every 20,000
copies or 12 months, whichever comes first, to prevent misfeeds
and jams. This is roughly the same time schedule as replacing the
OPC belt cartridge and cleaning the other rollers, so you may want
to do all of these procedures at the same time.
You need a lint-free cotton cloth, lightly dampened with water, to
perform this procedure. To clean the rollers
6 - 3 8
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
1. Turn off the printer and remove the power cord and all
interface cables.
2. Remove the media cassette.
3. Reach into the back of the cassette slot and locate the roller:
it’s on the top of the slot at the rear (fig. 6.21).
4. Use the damp cloth the wipe the roller. Rotate the roller so
that the entire surface is cleaned.
5. Locate the manual-feed platform: it’s a black plastic tray at
the top of the cassette slot (fig. 6.21).
Fig. 6.21 Locate the Manual-Feed Platform
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
6. Remove the manual-feed platform by lifting it up and forward
at the front of the platform until it drops out (fig. 6.22).
Fig. 6.22 Remove the Manual-Feed Platform
6 - 4 0
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
7. Locate the two manual-feed belts at the top of the cassette slot
(fig. 6.21).
8. Use the damp cloth the wipe the belts. Advance the belts so
that the entire surface is cleaned.
9. Slide the manual-feed platform back into place. Push it back
into the printer until it is secure.
10. If you have the optional 250-sheet feeder installed, repeat
steps 2 through 4 for that cassette.
11. Replace the media cassette.
12. Replace the cables you removed in step 1 and replace the
power cord.
Cleaning the Exterior of Your Printer
At times it may be necessary to clean the outside of your printer.
Be sure read all of this section before cleaning your printer.
WARNING!
Remove the printer’s power cord from the power
outlet before cleaning or an injury may result.
ACHTUNG!
Ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose
bevor Sie den Drucker reinigen.
To protect your printer and to maintain its appearance, make sure
you use the following guidelines:
■ Use only mild household cleaning solutions that do not
contain alcohol or solvents.
■ Use only a dry or slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Never use
sharp or rough implements,suchaswireorplasticcleaning
pads.
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
6 - 4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
■ Always spray the cleaning solution on a cloth, not directly
on the printer.
■ Always test the solution on a small area of your printer to
check the solution’s performance.
■ After cleaning, allow all parts to dry before closing the
printer, reattaching the power cord, and turning on the
power switch.
♦
6 - 4 2
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Introduction
This chapteroffershints forautomaticcolorcontrolandfine-tuning
color output,discussescolormatching,and lists the printer-resident
fonts.
QCOLOR Automatic Color Control
As with any form of color reproduction, many variables can
contribute to the final appearance of color laser prints. To take the
guesswork out of optimizing color output, QMS developed
QCOLOR, which dynamically configures the magicolor LX for the
best output quality based on the contents of the document (text, line
art, photographs, or scans) and the media it will be printed on.
QCOLOR technology is accessed through our Windows or
Macintosh driver.
Enabling QCOLOR for Windows
To use QCOLOR for Windows, first follow the instructions in
“Installing the Windows 3.1 Driver” in chapter 3, “Connecting the
Printer,” if you haven’t already. After the QMS Windows driver is
installed, do the following to optimize color printing:
1. Open the PostScript Printer driver dialog box.
You can do this from the Windows Control Panel by
double-clicking the Printers icon and then choosing the Setup
button.Also,youcangetto thePostScript Printerdriverdialog
box from within most Windows applications—usually by
choosing Print Setup from the File menu, and then choosing
the Setup or the Options button. Check your application help
or documentation for details.
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
2. In the PostScript Printer dialog box, choose your printer
(magicolor LX) in the Printers drop-down list.
3. Choose the Color Setup button.
4. In the Color Control Center dialog box, choose one of the
following:
■ Automatic Color Control (if you’re printing a
combination of document types)
Automatic Color Control is the best option for most jobs,
because it’s designed to provide the best color output for
a large variety of documents. However, if for some reason
the Automatic setting doesn’t provide satisfactory color
output fora particular page element ordocument type, then
select a more specific QCOLOR setting (for example,
Overhead for overhead transparencies or Photographic for
scanned images).
■ Graphics (if you’re printing color graphics)
■ Grayscale (if you’re printing images with gray shades)
■ Photographic (if you’re printing photographic images)
■ Text and Spot Color (if you’re printing text or spot
colors)
■ Third-Party Color Management System (CMS) (to
allow your application to control color settings)
■ Overhead (if you’re printing overhead transparencies)
You can use any of the QCOLOR color setup options for
transparency printing if you choose the Customize button
and then select the Transparency option in the Color Setup
dialog box (without changing any other options). If you do
this,the Customizeoptionwill appearintheQCOLOR setup
7 - 2
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
listbox when you return to the Color Control Center dialog
box.
NOTE: The media tray you’re using must be configured for
themedia typeit contains. This canbedonethroughtheprinter
front panel (in the Operator Control/Media menu). See
chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily Operations,” for more
information on media.
5. Choose OK.
NOTE: The settings chosen through Windows override settings
chosen through the printer’s front panel. Also, some applications
(like Aldus PageMaker and Ventura Publisher) specify color
outside the Windows driver, in which case the color settings in the
Windows driver are ignored.
Because QCOLOR automatically adjusts the Halftone, CRD,
Calibration, Gamma Correction, Dithering, Color Model, and
Media Selection, these settings in the Color Setup dialog box do
not have to be adjusted. To get more information about these and
other options in the driver, choose the Help button, or see the
“Fine-Tuning Color Output” section later in this chapter.
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Enabling QCOLOR for the Macintosh
Touse QCOLOR for Macintosh applications, follow the instructions
in “Installing LaserWriter 8.x and the magicolor LX 4.1 PPD” in
chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer.” After the QMS PPD is
installed, do the following to optimize color printing:
1. In your application’s Print dialog box, choose Options.
2. In the Options dialog box, in the QCOLOR Setup listbox, select
one of the following options:
■ Printer’s Default (to use the settings chosen at the printer
front panel)
■ Graphics (if you’re printing color graphics)
■ Photographic (if you’re printing photographic images)
■ Text and Spot Color (if you’re printing text or spot
colors)
■ Third-Party Color Management System (CMS) (to
allow your application to control color settings)
■ Overhead (if you’re printing overhead transparencies)
You can select any of the QCOLOR color setup options for
transparency printing if you select Transparency from the
Media listbox without changing any other options.
NOTE: The media tray you’re using must be configured for the
media type it contains. This can be donethroughtheprinter front
panel (in the Operator Control/Media menu). See chapter 5,
“Print Media and Daily Operations,” for more information on
media.
3. Choose the Save button to save the QCOLOR settings between
print jobs.
4. Choose OK.
7 - 4
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Because QCOLOR automatically adjusts the Halftone, Gamma
Correction, CRD, and (for the Overhead setting) Media Type,
these individual settings in the Options dialog box do not have
to be adjusted, so they are grayed out when a QCOLOR option
is chosen.
To be able to access individual settings such as Gamma
Correction and CRD, then QCOLOR must be turned off
(choose Printer’s Default from the QCOLORlist box to turn off
QCOLOR.) If you want information about the individual
settings, see the “Fine-Tuning Color Output” section later in
this chapter. To get more information about the standard
LaserWriter options, choose the Help button in the driver
window.
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Fine-Tuning Color Output
We’ve configured your printer so that most users don’t have to
change the default settings to get excellent color output, and we’ve
provided QCOLOR technology (through the QMS-supplied
Macintosh or Windows driver) to make it easy to automatically
optimize color output. (See “QCOLOR Automatic Color Control,”
earlier in this chapter, for more information.) However, the printer
is designed to allow you to change individual print-quality features
if you wish to, or if your application requiresyoutouse a non-QMS
Macintosh or Windows driver.
This section gives more detailed information about the individual
color settings available:
■ Printer default halftone
■ Dither pattern (not available in the Macintosh driver)
■ Gamma correction
■ Color rendering dictionary (CRD)
These settings can be changed in the printer configuration menu or
in the QMS-supplied Macintosh or Windows driver. See chapter
3, “Connecting the Printer,” for information on installing these
drivers.
Printer Default Halftone Settings
Halftone settings, such as screen line frequency and screen angles,
play an important part in the appearance of a color print. For
example, incorrect halftone angles can cause prints to have a
mottled appearance, called moiré.
7 - 6
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Screen frequency (also known as screen lines) is the number of
halftone cells per inch. The higher the frequency, the higher the
quality of the color print. Screen angles are the angles at which
halftone screens are placed in relation to one another to avoid
undesirable moiré patterns.
Although your application probably gives you the ability to
fine-tunehalftonesettings,wehaveprovidedseveralprinterdefault
settings that we have found to optimize print quality for different
printing tasks at different resolutions:
Enhanced Halftone
This halftone setting, which is the factory default setting, gives the
best results for most jobs, providing fine detail, with no banding,
rosettes, or moirés. The enhanced halftone has an effective line
screen of up to 95 lpi (at 600 dpi) with 161 halftone gray levels,
which allows theprinter to produceupto 4.2 millioncolors.Choose
this halftone setting in the following situations:
■ If your jobs contain a mixture of text, graphics, and/or
sampled images.
■ If you are using the Pantone POCE or Apple ColorSync
color management system, or if you are producing
PANTONE * simulations.
■ For optimum color matching whenusing a printer-resident
Color Rendering Dictionary.
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
106 lpi x 45° Halftone
This is the best halftone setting for printing halftone (as opposed
to spot color) graphics and text at 600 dpi resolution. We
recommend that you select Gamma106 gamma correction when
using this halftone (see “Gamma Correction,” later in this chapter,
for information).
71 lpi x 45° Halftone
This setting minimizes visible gradations (banding) at 600 dpi, but
provides less detail than the 106 lpi x 45° halftone setting. We
recommend that you select Gamma71 gamma correction when
using this halftone (see “Gamma Correction,” below, for
information).
80 lpi x 45° Halftone
This halftone setting optimizes halftone (as opposed to spot color)
graphics and text at 300 dpi resolution. We recommend that you
select Gamma80 gamma correction when using this halftone (see
“Gamma Correction,” below, for information).
53 lpi x 45° Halftone
This setting minimizes visible gradations (banding) at 300 dpi but
provides less detail than the 80 lpi x 45° halftone setting. We
recommend that you select Gamma53 gamma correction when
using this halftone (see “Gamma Correction,” below, for
information).
These halftone settings are available through the QMS-supplied
Macintosh or Windows driver (see chapter 3, “Connecting the
Printer,” for installation instructions and see the driver help for
more information), through the printer configuration menu
7 - 8
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
(Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Default Halftone
submenu), and through PS Executive SeriesUtilities (Color/Screen
Angles menu).
To see the effect of the currently selected default halftone, print a
Sample Page(from the Administration/Special Pages/Sample Page
submenu in the printer’s front panel or from PS Executive Series
Utilities).
NOTE: A halftone selection made in an application or a driver
overrides the printer default halftone setting.
Dither Pattern
NOTE: When using the Enhanced Halftone setting, the Dither
option should be set to Standard.
Dithering refers to the way halftone dots are placed on the page.
When printing halftones, increasing screen frequency results in
finer detail, but decreases the number of dots per halftone cell,
which decreases the number of colors that can be printed. With
fewer colors available, color shifts are lesssmooth and banding can
appear on prints.
To offset this effect, we’ve provided enhanced dithering settings
to smooth color transitions and decrease the banding that can occur
when using higher screen frequencies (lines per inch). In the
Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Default Dither menu, you
can choosefromStandard, Enhanced Low, EnhancedMedium, and
Enhanced High dithering. Standard, the factory default setting, is
PostScript-compatible dithering. Enhanced dithering reduces the
banding sometimes seen in PostScript-compatible dithering, with
enhanced high producing the least banding.
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Gamma Correction
NOTE: When using the Enhanced Halftone setting, Gamma
Correction should be set to None.
As with most other printer settings, gamma correction (which is a
means of optimizing gray scales and shades of color) can probably
be set through your application (see your application
documentation for more information.) However, we provide a
default gamma setting for each of the printer default halftone
settings: Gamma53, Gamma71, Gamma80, and Gamma106. We
also provide a None setting to turn off gamma correction.
Often in images, gray scaling or shades of color may be too light
or dark to show details clearly. Using gamma correction on a
gray-scale image is similar to using a graphic equalizer on a home
stereo: the range of gray levels is adjusted for the best possible
result. This sharpens overall midrange contrast while shadows and
highlights keep their original values.
Printer-Resident Color Rendering Dictionaries
If you use the QMS-supplied Windows or Macintosh driver (or an
application capable of PostScript Level 2 printing, such as Adobe
PhotoShop), the printer-resident CRDs allow you to achieve
device-independent color. Your printer comes with a Colorimetric
CRD, a Business CRD, and a Photographic CRD.
Each CRD is provided in a 300 dpi and a 600 dpi version. Choose
a 300 CRD setting (along with the Enhanced halftone) when
printing in 300 dpi resolution. Choose a 600 CRD setting (along
with the Enhanced halftone) when printing in 600 dpi resolution.
7 - 1 0
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
The Colorimetric CRD
The Colorimetric CRD is designed for very basic color matching
and one-to-one conversion from CIE color to CMYK color. With
Colorimetric chosen as the printer default CRD, all colors are
reproduced exactly unless a specified color is “out of gamut” (out
of the printer’s range). For out of gamut colors, the Colorimetric
CRD substitutes the closest “in-gamut” color. The result is that
exact color matches between the two devices are maintained
wherever possible, but the printed image may have a smaller range
of colors than the original image (since several image colors may
be mapped to a single printer color). We recommend that you use
this CRD for printing spot colors.
The Business CRD
The Business CRD matches the images on a monitor as closely as
possible (WYSIWYG). Use the Business CRD for
computer-generated graphics.
The Photographic CRD
QMS developed the Photographic CRD to optimize the quality of
photographic images and other images with many subtle color
shifts. Like the Colorimetric CRD, the Photographic CRD
substitutes out-of-gamut colors with in-gamut colors, but it also
adjusts (compresses) all other colors (whether in-gamut or
out-of-gamut) as necessary to maintain the proportional
relationship between the colors.
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Color Management
A major concern in the color publishing industry today is keeping
color consistent across devices with different color models. For
example, when you scan a color photograph, the scanner sends the
image data to the computer in an RGB (Red-Blue-Green) format.
The computer then converts the data into another RGB format to
display it on the monitor. When the image data is sent to the printer,
it is converted into CYMK (Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-blacK) format
by the printer driver or application. Because of these conversions,
a color output device (like your printer) may produce colors
dramatically different from those seen on the computer screen, or
in the original image.
To keep colors more consistent, you can use color management.
Color management involves two processes: calibration and color
matching.
Device Calibration
Calibration ensures that the hardware of a targeted device produces
consistent color every time.
Color Matching
Even if you calibrate your color-generating devices, these devices
still speak different color languages unless you have a color
management system to translate between them. Color matching
uses software to describe colors for different devices in a common
language to make sure that color is produced in the same shade on
all devices.
7 - 1 2
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
There are currently three methods of color matching:
■ Color management systems
■ PostScript Level 2
■ PANTONE *Color matching.
Methods of Color Matching
Color Matching with a CMS
Color management systems (CMSs) work by translating color
information from different devices into a common language. A
CMS firstgetsinformationabout the waythese devices create color
and the range of colors they can produce. (This information is
contained in device profiles.) Then, using this information, the
CMS maps each device’s color descriptions to the CIE model,
which is an international, device-independent standard for color.
For example, to make a printer’s color output look the same as the
colors on your computer monitor, a CMS translates the monitor’s
RGB colors into device-independent CIE color, and then translates
from the CIE color into the printer’s CMYK colors. A CMS can
warn you (or automatically adjust color) when the colors you
specify are outside the output device’s range, and they can show
you on screen how the printed output will look.
The advantages of using a CMS are that you get consistent color
across all devices, and an on-screen preview of output. However,
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
CMSs are not portable acrossplatforms, theycanbe expensive, and
they do consume processing time and power at the host.
A few well-known color management systems include Kodak
ColorSense, Agfa FotoFlow, Electronics for Imaging EFIColor,
Pantone POCE, and Apple ColorSync. The following are shipped
with your printer:
■ A ColorSync device profile
■ A Pantone POCE CMM (Color Matching Method)
■ A Pantone POCE device profile
■ An ICC (International Color Consortium) device profile
If this profile is not included with your printer, call QMS
Customer Technical Assurance to check for availability.
Instructions for installation and use are included on the Pantone
disk provided with the printer.
Color Matching with PostScript Level 2
Your printer’s PostScript Level 2 capabilities allow it to accept
device-independent CIE color specification directly (in addition to
CMYK or RGB color specifications). This means that if you have
an application that supports PostScript Level 2 printing (such as
Adobe PhotoShop) or if you use the QMS-developed driver for
Windows or Macintosh, your printer will perform color matching
automatically. QMS drivers for Windows and Macintosh were
shipped on disks with your printer: see chapter 3, “Connecting the
Printer,” of this manual for installation information. These drivers
workwith the printer-resident colorrenderingdictionariestomatch
colors. See “Printer-Resident Color Rendering Dictionaries”
earlier in this chapter for more information on CRDs.
7 - 1 4
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
The advantages of Level 2 color matching are that it is portable, it
is application- and printer-resident (there’s nothing else to buy),
and it is performed at the printer level (so it doesn’t tie up your
host). However, no on-screen preview of output is provided, and
you are not warned if a color is out of printer’s gamut (color range).
PANTONE * Color Matching
Your printer has been approved by Pantone Inc. to simulate
PANTONE Colors. Pantonespecifieshundredsofspotcolors, each
identified by a unique number. Each of these spot colors can be
simulated on the printer with the appropriate combination of
process (CMYK) colors.
Within a Pantone-licensed application (such as Aldus FreeHand or
Adobe Illustrator), youcan choose a PANTONEColor numberand
the corresponding CMYK simulation is printed. Pantone tables for
supporting applications are shipped on a Pantone disk with the
printer, including the following:
■ Aldus FreeHand (Macintosh and Windows)
■ Adobe Illustrator (Macintosh and Windows)
■ QuarkXpress (Macintosh only)
■ CorelDRAW (Windows only)
Instructions for installation and use are included on the Pantone
disk provided with the printer. (If you did not receive a Pantone
disk with your printer, call QMS Customer Technical Assurance.)
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
If
a
particular application does not support
PANTONE *-identified colors, but does allow process color
specification, the CMYK values may be entered directly to
simulate PANTONE Colors. For this purpose, the following
PANTONE Color look-up charts—containing four-color
simulationsof Pantone-identifiedcolorsandthepercentage of each
process color used to create them—are included with your printer:
■ PANTONE.PS (for PCs)
This a PostScript file containing a PANTONE Color
look-up chart.
■ Pantone Prism Demo (for Macintosh)
This is autility forprintingouta PANTONEColor look-up
chart.
■ Pantone Professional Color Toolkit (for Macintosh)
This an application that is required for Pantone support for
QuarkXpress for the Macintosh, which also provides a
PANTONE Color look-up chart.
Instructions for installation and use of these files are included on
the Pantone disk shipped with your printer.
The formulas in the PANTONE Color look-up charts result in
Pantone-approved color only under the following conditions:
■ A Pantone-licensed application (such as Adobe Illustrator,
QuarkXPress, and Aldus FreeHand) is used to create the
color.
■ The colors are printed with QMS-supplied toner.
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.
7 - 1 6
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
■ The colors are printed on Hammermill Laser Print white
paper.
■ The printer’s Administration/Emulations/PostScript/
Default Halftones option is set to Enhanced (if you have a
magicolor LX with system software version3.x or higher).
NOTE: The formulas listed in the Pantone charts are only for the
magicolor LX printer. Also, the PANTONE * Colors
generated by this printer are four-color process
simulations and may not exactly match
Pantone-identified solid color standards. Use current
PANTONE Color Reference Manuals (available from
Pantone, Inc.) for accurate color.
The advantages of using PANTONE Color matching are that it is
easy to use, it is widely supported, and that it is good for spot color.
However, it is not as accurate as other methods of color matching,
it can’t be used for photographs, and it is only supported by
applications.
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
The Resident PostScript Fonts
This section lists thefonts resident inyour printer. All of these fonts
are authentic: they are licensed and carry the true name. See your
QMS vendor if you are interested in obtaining more fonts.
Serif
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light Italic
ITC Bookman Demibold
ITC Bookman Demibold Italic
Courier
Courier Oblique
Courier Bold
Courier Bold Oblique
New Century Schoolbook
New Century Schoolbook Italic
New Century Schoolbook Bold
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
Palatino
Palatino Italic
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
Times Roman
Times Italic
Times Bold
Times Bold Italic
Sans
Serif
ITC Avant Garde Book
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Demibold
ITC Avant Garde Demibold Oblique
Helvetica
Helvetica Oblique
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Oblique
7 - 1 8
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed Oblique
Helvetica Condensed Bold
Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Script
Pi
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
Symbol
ITC Zapf Dingbats
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
7 - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
The Resident HP PCL Fonts
The following typefaces are included with your printer for use with
the HP PCL emulation. Courier 10 is 10 point, 12 pitch; Courier
12 is 12 point, 10 pitch. The Courier and Lineprinter fonts are
bitmapped; the others are scalable. The default is Courier 12.
Courier 10 Medium
Courier 10 Bold
Courier 10 Italic Medium
Courier 12 Medium
Courier 12 Bold
Courier 12 Italic Medium
Line Printer Medium (8.5 point, 16.66 pitch)
Linotype Times Roman Medium
Linotype Times Roman Italic Medium
Linotype Times Roman Bold
Linotype Times Roman Italic Bold
Linotype Univers Medium
Linotype Univers Italic Medium
Linotype Univers Bold
Linotype Univers Italic Bold
Linotype Univers Condensed Medium
Linotype Univers Condensed Italic Medium
Linotype Univers Condensed Bold
Linotype Univers Condensed Italic Bold
ITC Zapf Dingbats Medium
♦
7 - 2 0
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Introduction
This chapter discusses installing printer options. If your QMS
vendor cannot offer these options for your printer, see the “QMS
World-wide Offices” section in appendix A, “QMS Customer
Support,” for telephone numbers to call for information.
The Sheet Feeder
The optional sheet feeder holds up to 250 sheets of media, which
means less operator time spent refilling cassettes. It also provides
printing flexibility; for example, you can load laser paper in the
standardcassetteandplain paperin thesheetfeeder’scassette. Plus,
this compact unit fits directly under the printer, so it requires no
additional desktop space. Media and envelope cassettes are
interchangeable between the printer and the optional sheet feeder.
Installing the Sheet Feeder
Unpack the sheet feeder and make sure you received the following:
■ Sheet feeder unit
■ Two small metal brackets
■ Four large plastic corner brackets
NOTE: There may be several other pieces with the sheet feeder,
but they are not required for this procedure.
WARNING!
Your printer weighs approximately 106 lbs (48
kg) without consumables. Be sure to have help when lifting and
moving it. If consumables are installed, be sure to keep the
printer level when moving it to prevent accidental spills.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
ACHTUNG!
Das Gewicht dieses Druckers beträgt ohne Ver-
brauchsmaterial ca. 48 kg. Bitte versuchen Sie niemals, den
Drucker alleine anzuheben oder zu transportieren. Achten Sie
bitte darauf, daß der Drucker mit eingebauten Tonerkar-
tuschen nur waagerecht transportiert wird.
1. Turn the printer off, remove the power cord, and disconnect
all interface cables from the printer.
2. With the help of another person, pick upthe printer by the four
corners and align it above the sheet feeder (fig. 8.1).
3. Keeping the printer level, lower it onto the sheet feeder (fig.
8.1). The bottom side edges of the printer rest inside the sides
of the sheet feeder.
Fig. 8.1 Lower Printer onto the Sheet Feeder
4. Install the two small metal brackets using the following
procedure:
a. Align one of the metalbrackets with the outside of the metalpost
on the front right side of the sheet feeder (fig. 8.2). Make sure
8 - 2
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
the holes on the post and bracket are centered and that the flange
on the bottom of the bracket goes into the slot on the post.
b. Attach the bracket to the post using one of the two small metal
screws that came with the sheet feeder (fig. 8.2).
c. Align and attach the second metal bracket to the rear left sheet
feeder post in the same way as you did the first bracket (fig. 8.2).
Fig. 8.2 Install the Metal Brackets
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
5. Check the inside of the four plastic corner brackets. Each is
labeled to indicate which corner of the sheet feeder it fits in.
6. Snap the plastic brackets onto the appropriate corners of the
sheet feeder (fig. 8.3). These brackets have small rims on the
bottom that fit inside the edges of the sheet feeder.
Fig. 8.3 Attach the Corner Brackets
The sheet feeder is now installed. See chapter 5, “Print Media and
Daily Operations,” for information on handling media and filling
cassettes.
NOTE: If you move the printer with the sheet feeder attached, lift
the unit by the four bottom corners, not by the sheet
feeder’s cassette slot. Before moving the printer, be sure
to read “Moving the Printer” in chapter 6.
8 - 4
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Using the Envelope Cassette
You can purchase an envelope cassette from your QMS vendor.
2
The envelope cassette holds up to 30 24-lb (90 g/m ) DL and Com
10envelopes. Itfits in the slot forthestandardor the optional media
tray, but we recommend it be used in the standard slot. To use the
envelope cassette
1. Remove the paper cassette from the printer (fig. 8.4).
Fig. 8.4 Remove the Paper Cassette
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
2. On the envelope cassette, set the back and side envelope
stackers (figs. 8.5 and 8.6) to the correct envelope size.
Fig. 8.5 Set the side stackers
Fig. 8.6 Set the rear stacker
8 - 6
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
3. Setthe envelope-sizekeyto the correctenvelope size (fig.8.7)
Fig. 8.7. Set the size key
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
4. Lift the stacker arm and load 30 or fewer envelopes
printing-side up, so that the flap side will be on the left when
the envelope is pulled into the printer (fig. 8.8).
Fig. 8.8 Load the envelopes
5. Lower the stacker arm.
8 - 8
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
6. Slide the envelope cassette into the printer (fig. 8.9).
Fig. 8.9 Slide the cassette into the printer
7. Make sure you select the correct envelope size through your
driver when printing.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Font and Emulation Cards
You can purchase cards containing emulations or fonts not resident
on the printer. The printer can support two cards at once, either two
font cards or a font and an emulation card. Fonts and emulation
cards may go in either of the two slots located on the front of the
printer, below the control panel. For a complete list of currently
available cards, contact your QMS vendor.
CAUTION: Usually, the printer must be off line before you insert
or remove a card. Press the Online/Offline key to turn the LED off.
If you forget to take the printer off line, turn the printer power off
and back on to regain access to the printer’s resident fonts and the
data stored in the printer’s memory.
However, before installing or removing the LN03 Plus or the
ProCollection font card, you must turn off your printer rather than
just take it off line. Then turn the printer back on after you finish.
Using Font and Emulation Cards
Use the following procedure to install a font or emulation card:
1. If you are installing an LN03 Plus or a ProCollection card,
turn off the printer. Otherwise, press the Online/Offline key
to take the printer off line (the LED should be off).
CAUTION: Font and emulationcards fit in only onedirection,with
the front label facing left, toward the center of the printer. Do not
force them in backwards; this could damage the card and printer.
8 - 1 0
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
2. Insert the card into either slot (fig. 8.10) with the front label
side facing left toward the inside of the printer.
Fig. 8.10 Insert the Font or Emulation Card
3. Depending on the type of card you are installing, either turn
the printer on again or put it back on line.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
To remove a card, use the following procedure:
1. If you are removing an LN03 Plus or a ProCollection card,
turn off the printer. Otherwise, press the Online/Offline key
to take the printer off line (the LED should be off).
2. Pull the card out gently.
3. Depending on the type of card you are removing, either turn
the printer on again or put it back on line.
NOTE: If you are using an application, make sure the printer
driver installed supports the fonts on the card, if you want
to use those fonts. If not, contact your application
manufacturer for support.
8 - 1 2
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Security Cards
An optional security card allows the Operator Control and
Administration menus to be password protected, so that only users
who know the password can change printer configurations. When
a security card is installed, a new menu, Installation, appears in the
printer’s Configuration menu. The Installation menu is used to
password-protect the printer.
CAUTION: The printer must be off line before you insert or
remove a security card. If you forget to take the printer off line
before you insert or remove a security card, turn the printer off and
back on again to regain access to the data stored in the printer’s
memory.
Using a Security Card
A security card uses the same slots as font and emulation cards.
The card slots are located on the front of the printer below the
control panel. The following instructions explain how to use a
security card:
1. Take the printer off line.
CAUTION: A security card fits inonly one direction, withthe front
label facing left, toward the center of the printer. Do not force the
card in backwards; this could damage the card and printer.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
2. Insert the security card into either slot with the card’s front
label facing left, toward the inside of the printer (fig. 8.11).
Fig. 8.11 Insert the Security Card
3. Press the Menu key to enter the Configuration menu. Press
the Next key until the following message displays in the
control panel message window:
CONFIGURATION
INSTALLATION
8 - 1 4
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
4. Press the Select key to enter the Installation menu, then use
the Next key to view the menu options:
OPERATOR PASSWRD
USE OPERATOR PWD
ADMIN PASSWORD
USE ADMIN PWD
5. To password-protect the Operator Control menu, press Select
to display the message
INSTALLATION
OPERATOR PASSWRD
Then, specify the password. (See the section “Entering
Alphanumeric Values” in chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,“
for detailed instructions for entering alphanumeric values.)
6. When you have entered the complete password, press the
Select key. This saves the password and returns you to the
Installation menu.
7. To turn on the Password option, press the Next key to display
the message
INSTALLATION
USE OPERATOR PWD
8. Press the Selectkeytoenter this submenu. ThenpresstheNext
key to display the message
USE OPERATOR PWD
YES
9. Press the Select key. This activates the password option and
returns you to the Installation menu.
10. To password-protect the Administration menu, press the Next
key to display
INSTALLATION
ADMIN PASSWORD
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
11. Press Select, then specify the password. (See the section
“Entering Alphanumeric Values” in chapter 4, “Printer
Configuration,” for detailed instructions for entering
alphanumeric values.)
12. When you have entered the complete password, press the
Select key. This saves the password and returns you to the
Installation menu.
13. To turn on the Password option, press the Next key to display
the message
INSTALLATION
USE ADMIN PWD
14. Press Select to enter this submenu. Press the Next key to
display
USE ADMIN PWD
YES
15. Press Select. This returns you to the Installation menu.
16. Once the passwords are entered and activated, press the Menu
key to return to the Main menu. The following message is
displayed:
SAVE CHANGES?
*NO
17. Press the Next key to display
SAVE CHANGES?
YES
18. Press Select. Remove the security card from the card slot, and
put the printer back on line.
8 - 1 6
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Once a menu is password-protected, you cannot enter it or make
changes in it until you enter a valid password. You know a menu
is password protected if
ENTER PASSWORD
appears on the message window when you try to enter the
Configuration menu. If you enter an invalid password, the message
window flashes
INVALID PASSWORD
for three seconds, and then returns to the parent menu. If you forget
the password, the system administrator can easily recover it by
repeating the “Using a Security Card” procedure.
If you enter the correct password, you are allowed to enter the
menu. The password for the two menus may be the same or
different.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Removing the Controller Board
The first step in installing many printer options is removing the
printer’s controller board.
The following instructions for removing the controller board are
written for advanced users. Do not attempt this procedure if you
have no experience working with circuit boards.
CAUTION: It’s very important to protect the printer controller
board from electrostatic damage while performing this task.
If an anti-static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit,
attachone endofittoyour wrist andthe otherend toanyconvenient
electrical ground (for example, the bare metal chassis of equip-
ment, as on the back of a computer, that is plugged in but turned
off). Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an
electrical current present. Turn off all power switches first. Plastic,
rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not ac-
ceptable grounding points. The printer isn’t an acceptable ground-
ing point either because it must be unplugged before you perform
this task.
If you don’t have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body’s
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the
tray assembly cover. Redischarge your body each time after walk-
ing around and before touching the printer tray assembly again.
Handle the tray carefully, and try to handle it by the edges only.
8 - 1 8
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
1. Turn the printer off and remove the power cord. Disconnect
all interface cables from the printer.
2. Position the printer so that the back is facing you.
3. Using a screwdriver, loosen the two mounting screws that
hold the controller board to the printer (fig. 8.12).
4. Grasping the board by the top and bottom metal rims, gently
pull the controller board straight out and lay it on a flat surface
(fig. 8.12).
Fig. 8.12 Remove the Mounting Screws
5. Install your printer option and then refer to the following
section, “Replacing the Controller Board.”
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Replacing the Controller Board
This section explain how to replace the controller board after
installing a printer option.
The following instructions are written for advanced users. Do not
attempt this procedure if you have no experience working with
circuit boards.
CAUTION: It’s very important to protect the printer controller
board from electrostatic damage while performing this task.
If an anti-static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit,
attachone endofittoyour wrist andthe otherend toanyconvenient
electrical ground (for example, the bare metal chassis of equip-
ment, as on the back of a computer, that is plugged in but turned
off). Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an
electrical current present. Turn off all power switches first. Plastic,
rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not ac-
ceptable grounding points. The printer isn’t an acceptable ground-
ing point either because it must be unplugged before you perform
this task.
If you don’t have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body’s
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the
tray assembly cover. Redischarge your body each time after walk-
ing around and before touching the printer tray assembly again.
Handle the tray carefully, and try to handle it by the edges only.
8 - 2 0
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
1. Using both hands, carefully reinsert the controller board (fig.
8.13) making sure the controller board is properly seated in
its connectors.
2. Retighten the two mounting screws you loosened previously
(fig. 8.13).
Fig. 8.13 Reinstall the Controller Board
3. Reconnect all interface cables and the power cord, and then
turn on the printer.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Single In-Line Memory Modules (SIMMs)
Additional printer memory allows you to increase data transfer and
processing speed. To install SIMMs,
1. Follow the instructions in “Removing the Controller Board”
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to discharge
electrostatic buildup before you begin.
2. Turn the controller board so that the side where the SIMMs
are located is closest to you and the SIMMs are located on
your right side.
3. If there are enough open connectors for the additional SIMMs
you are installing, skip to step 6. However, if you need to
remove existing SIMMs to make space for new ones, follow
the instructions in steps 4 and 5.
4. If you need to remove a SIMM to make room for
larger-memory SIMMs: Use the clips located on each side of
the connector to gently release the SIMM.
CAUTION: If you are removing SIMMs, remember that printer
operation requires at least 12 MB of total memory, with at least 4
MB of that memory in the slot closest to the center of the board.
8 - 2 2
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
5. Tilt the SIMM back to a 45° angle and slide it up and out of
the connector (fig. 8.14).
Fig. 8.14 Tilt the SIMM Back and Remove It
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
6. Remove the new SIMM from the anti-static bag.
7. Hold the new SIMM at a 45° angle, with the notch on the
right-hand side (fig. 8.15). Insert the bottom edge of the new
SIMM into an open connector.
Fig. 8.15 Insert the SIMM into the Connector
8 - 2 4
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
8. Gently pull the SIMM forward to a 90° angle until you feel it
fit into place (fig. 8.16) behind the clips on either side of the
connector. (You may need to use your fingers to open these
clips.) Whenseated, the SIMM stands upright, firmlyin place.
CAUTION: If you cannot easily fit the SIMM into place, do not
force it. Reposition it, making sure that the bottom of the SIMM
is seated completely in the connector. If there’s not enough room
between SIMMs to properly tilt and insert the new ones, first
remove all the SIMMs, install the new ones, then re-install the old
ones. Steps 4 and 5, above, explain how to remove SIMMs.
90
Fig. 8.16 Pull the SIMM Forward into Position
9. Follow the instructions in “Replacing the Controller Board”
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to follow the directions
for eliminating electrostatic buildup.
NOTE: You may want to print out an advanced status page
(Administration/Special Pages submenu) so you have a
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
record of your changesbefore you go to the next step. See
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for information on
using the configuration menu.
10. In the printer configuration menu, use the Administration/
Miscellaneous/Restore Defaults option to make the printer
recognize the additional memory.
The Administration/Memory section in chapter 4, “Printer
Configuration,” and Appendix D, “Additional Technical
Information,” contain information about printer memory.
Installing a Network Interface
This section describes how to install a network interface.
NOTE: The QMS magicolor LX printer is compatible only
magicolor LXnetwork interfaces. If anon-magicolor LX
interface is installed,thefollowingerrormessage appears
on the start-up page: “Incompatible network option
installed.” Also, depending on which type of interface
you are installing, the interface card in the illustrations
accompanying these instructions may look slightly
different from your interface card, but the installation
procedure is the same.
Make sure you have all the parts necessary for the interface
installation. The network interface kit includes the following:
■ An anti-static wristband
■ A network interface card and two plastic support posts
■ A daughterboard and two plastic support posts
8 - 2 6
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
■ An external power supply box (not needed for all
interfaces)
■ An interface plate
Your kit may contain additional parts not required for network
interface installation on this particular printer.
1. Follow the instructions in “Removing the Controller Board”
(earlier in this chapter), beingcarefulto eliminate electrostatic
buildup before you begin.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two screws from the
blank optional I/O plate, and then remove the plate from the
interface panel and set it aside (fig. 8.17).
Fig. 8.17 Remove the Optional I/O Plate
8 - 2 8
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
3. Examine the ends of the two plastic support posts that come
with the smaller network interface card: one end has a slightly
larger diameter and the other end is slightly more tapered.
Insert the larger ends into the controller board (fig. 8.18).
4. Snap the network interface card onto the plastic support posts
(fig. 8.18). (If you have trouble snapping the interface board
onto the support posts, you probably inserted the wrong ends
of the posts into the controller board in step 3.)
5. Using the two screws you removed in step 2, fasten the new
interface plate to network interface card to hold the card in
place (fig. 8.18).
Fig. 8.18 Attach Support Posts to Controller Board
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
6. Hold the plastic ribbon cable so that the notch (key) on one
endfaces upwardand slide it onto the interface card connector
(fig. 8.19). Fold the plastic ribbon cable over so that the notch
(key) on the other end is facing to the right and slide it into
the controller board connector to the left of the network
interface card. (You may have to open the ejector latches on
the connectors to be able to connect the ribbon cable.)
Fig. 8.19 Connect Both Ends of the Cable
8 - 3 0
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
7. Examine the ends of the two plastic support posts that come
with the daughterboard: one end has a slightly larger diameter
and the other end is slightly more tapered. Insert the larger
ends into the controller board.
8. Attach the daughterboard to the two support posts and the two
48-pin connectors (fig. 8.20). (The daughterboard is keyed so
that it fits only one way.)
Fig. 8.20 Attach the Daughterboard to Support Posts
9. Follow the instructions in “Replacing the Controller Board”
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static
electricity.
10. If your interface kit came with an external power supply box,
attach it to the round connector next to the network interface
port; then connect the box to a power cord and plug the power
cord into an electrical outlet.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Using an Optional Network Interface
After you have correctly installed an optional network interface,
refer to the following for more information:
■ The “Administration/Communications/Serial” section of
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” contains information
about the PS Protocol option in the new optional network
interface submenu that appears in the Administration/
Communications menu.
■ The manualthat comes with the optionalnetwork interface
contains information about all other options in the new
network interface submenu, as well as instructions for
connecting the printer to the network and for printing over
the network.
■ Your network documentation alsocontainsinformation on
printing over the network.
8 - 3 2
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Centronics to Dataproducts Conversion
Your printer is shipped with a Centronics parallel port, but a kit for
converting it to Dataproducts is available from your QMS vendor.
Make sure you have all the parts necessary for the conversion. The
Dataproducts conversion kit includes the following:
■ An anti-static wristband
■ Two 2-pin shunts (small plastic pieces lined with metal)
■ Two DIP resistors (a 220 ohm and a 330 ohm)
■ Two SIP resistors (not necessary for this procedure)
■ A 50-pin to 36-pin cable
1. Follow the instructions in “Removing the Controller Board”
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static
electricity before you begin.
2. Orient the controller board so that the side with the SIMMs is
closest to you and the parallel port is located on your left side.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
3. If you don’t have an network interface board installed, skip to
step 4. If you do have an network interface board installed,
follow the instructions below for removing it:
a. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two screws from the
interface plate (fig. 8.21).
b. Detach the plastic ribbon cable from the interface card.
c. Remove the network interfacecard from its plastic support posts
and put it aside (fig. 8.21).
Fig. 8.21 Remove the Network Interface Board
8 - 3 4
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
4. Place the two shunts on jumpers JP1 and JP2 (fig. 8.22). Make
sure both sets of pins are covered by the shunts.
JP2
JP1
Fig. 8.22 Place the Shunts on the Jumpers
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
5. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to remove the existing 1K-ohm
DIP resistor from the RP1 socket (fig. 8.23). Gently slide the
screwdriver under the resistor and lift it up and off the
controller board.
Fig. 8.23 Remove the DIP Resistor
8 - 3 6
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
6. Line up the notch on the 220-ohm DIP resistor with the notch
on the RP1 socket. Carefully insert the resistor’s pins in the
socket. Then align and install the 330-ohm DIP resistor in the
RP2 socket the same way (fig. 8.24).
220 ohm
330 ohm
RP1
RP2
Fig. 8.24 Insert the New DIP Resistors
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
7. If you didn’t remove a network interface board, skip to step
8. If you need to replace your network interface board
installed, follow the instructions below:
a. Snap the network interface card onto the plastic support posts
(fig. 8.18).
b. Using the two screws you removed earlier, refasten the interface
plate to hold the network card in place (fig. 8.18).
c. Hold the plastic ribbon cable so that the notch (key) on one end
faces upward and slide it onto the interface card connector (fig.
8.19).
8. Make sure no components on the board shifted or loosened
during the procedure, especially the SIMMs.
9. Follow the instructions in “Replacing the Controller Board”
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static
electricity.
10. Use the 50-pin to 36-pin cable included in your kit to connect
the Dataproducts cable to the parallel port.
8 - 3 8
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Internal Hard Disk Installation
These instructions explain how to replace the internal hard disk.
Make sure you have all the parts necessary for the procedure. The
internal hard disk upgrade kit includes the following:
■ An internal hard disk
■ An antistatic wristband
1. Follow the instructions in “Removing the Controller Board”
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static
electricity before you begin.
2. Orient the controller board so that the side with the SIMMs is
closest to you and the parallel port is located on your left side.
3. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the hard disk but leave the
cable attached to the controller board.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
4. Remove the old disk by pulling up on each corner while
steadying the board near the disk with one hand (fig. 8.25).
CAUTION: This disk fits tightly, so you have to pull firmly, but
be careful not to flex the controller board while doing so.
Fig. 8.25 Remove the Old Hard Disk
8 - 4 0
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
5. Hold the new disk vertically (connector-side down with the
bracket facing the SIMMs) and connect it to the ribbon cable
(fig. 8.26). Inspect the connection from all four sides to make
sure each pin is seated in the connector (no pins are
exposed).
Fig. 8.26 Install the New Hard Disk
6. Align the new disk over its position on the board, then attach
it to the boardbypressingfirmly onthecorners(notthecenter)
with one hand while steadying the board with the other hand
as you snap the disk in place.
7. Make sure no other components on the board shifted or
loosened during the installation procedure, especially the
SIMMs and any optional interface boards.
8. Follow the instructions in “Replacing the Controller Board”
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static
electricity.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
If the printer fails to work properly after you replace the hard disk,
check the following:
■ Make sure the power cord and all interface cables are
connected correctly and tightly, and that the printer power
is on.
■ Make sure that you didn’t miss any pins when you
reattached the ribbon cable (no pins should be exposed).
■ Make sure no other components shifted or loosenedduring
the installation procedure, especially the SIMMs and any
optional interface boards.
If you’ve checked all of the above and the printer still doesn’t work
properly, see appendix A, “QMS Customer Support,” for
information on how to contact us.
8 - 4 2
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Using External Hard Disks
In addition to the internal hard disk, your printer supports up to six
optional external hard disks through its SCSI port. When an
external hard disk is connected to the printer, you control the disk
through the Administration/Disk Operations submenu (fig. 8.27).
This section explains how to use the Disk Operations submenu to
download and remove fonts or emulations. (You can also load
optional fonts and emulations from cards asdescribedearlier in this
chapter in “Using Font and Emulation Cards.”)
ADMINISTRATION
DISK OPERATIONS
Se le c t
Pre vio us
Ne xt
DISK OPERATIONS
INSTALL OPTION
DISK OPERATIONS
COLLATION
DISK OPERATIONS
REMOVE OPTION
DISK OPERATIONS
SPOOL OVERFLOW
DISK OPERATIONS
FORMAT DISK
Fig. 8.27 Disk Operations Submenu
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
CAUTION: If you connect to this printer an external hard disk you
previously used with an earlier QMS Crown printer, this QMS
magicolor LX software automatically reorganizes the files on the
external hard disk when the printer is turned off and back on. Once
this reorganization is done, the files on the hard disk can no longer
be accessed if the hard disk is reattached to an earlier QMS Crown
printer. The printer release number is indicated on the status and
start-up pages.
This reorganization takes time. Don’t interrupt the reorganization,
because all files on the disk might be lost.
NOTE: If an error occurs during these operations, an error
message displays until you press theMenu key. You must
then restart the operation from the beginning. Two error
messages you may see are READ FAILURE (the disk
hasencounteredareaderror) and WRITE ERROR(either
the hard disk had a write error or there is no room for data
on the hard disk or in RAM).
8 - 4 4
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Identifying External Hard Disks
The external hard disks are identified by their device numbers;
these numbers can range from DSK0 to DSK5 (fig. 8.28). The
internal disk in your printer is always DSK6. Device numbers of
external disks can be configured by the installer.
Fig. 8.28 External Hard Disk Device Numbers
Formatting an External Hard Disk
You have two methods of formatting an external hard disk:
■ Formatting via the Control Panel
■ Formatting via PS Executive Series Utilities
CAUTION: Be extremely careful when formatting hard disks.
Only format DSK6, which contains the system software, if there is
a specific reason to do so. For example, you might reformat the
disk to clear up unexplained disk behavior or toavoid a servicecall.
If you want to format DSK6, use the procedure in “Formatting the
Internal Hard Disk” in this chapter. If you do format DSK6, you
will not be able to use the printer until you reload the system
software (provided on a with your printer). See “Installing Print
System Software and Fonts” later in this chapter for details.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Formatting an External Hard Disk via the Control Panel
Use the following procedure to format an external hard disk using
the printer’s control panel.
NOTE: If the FORMAT FAILED message displays in the
message window during the Format Disk operation, the
disk cannot be used. Press the Menu key to remove the
message and contact your printer vendor.
1. With the printer off line (the Online LED is off), press the
Menu and Next keys to display the message
ADMINISTRATION
DISK OPERATIONS
2. Press the Select key to enter the Disk Operations menu. Then,
if necessary, press the Next key to display the message
DISK OPERATIONS
FORMAT DISK
3. Press the Select key to enter the Format Disk submenu.
4. Press the Next key until the address of the hard disk you want
to format displays in the message window; then press the
Select key.
5. When you are prompted
ARE YOU SURE?
NO
press the Next key to display the message
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
6. Press the Select key to start the format procedure.
8 - 4 6
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
CAUTION: During the formatting procedure, various messages
mayappear, the printer automatically restarts, andthecontrol panel
lights flash. Do not interrupt this process because the formatting
will be incorrect.
7. When the format procedure is complete, the following
message momentarily displays:
FORMAT DISK
FORMAT COMPLETE
and then message window displays
IDLE
Formatting an External Hard Disk via PS Executive
PS Executive Series Utilities offer formatting options for both
Macintosh and PC setups. See the README file on the PS
Executive disk for information on installing the utilities and see the
on-line documentation for details on formatting disks.
Installing an Optional Card Font or Emulation
To install optional fonts and emulations on a hard disk, use the
following procedure:
1. Make sure the printer is off line. Press the Menukey to display
CONFIGURATION
ADMINISTRATION
2. Press the Select key to enter the Administration menu; then
press the Next key to display
ADMINISTRATION
DISK OPERATIONS
3. Press the Select key to enter the Disk Operations menu. Press
the Next key to display
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
DISK OPERATIONS
INSTALL OPTION
4. Press the Select key to enter the Install Option submenu. Press
the Nextkey until the harddiskdestinationof the optional font
or emulation displays in the message window.
5. Press Select to enter the destination. Then, press the Next key
until the source of the optional font or emulation displays in
the message window.
6. When you are prompted, insert the font or emulation card into
a slot on the front of the printer.
7. Press the Select key to enter the source. The printer copies the
contents of the card to the hard disk.
8. When the copying process is complete, press the Menu key to
exit the menu.
9. To remove the card, use the following procedure:
a. If you are removing an LN03 Plus or a ProCollection font card,
turn off the printer. Otherwise, make sure the printer is off line
(use the Online/Offline key to turn off the LED).
b. Pull the card out gently.
c. Turn on the printer, if it’s off, and put it back on line.
NOTE: To use these fonts or emulations from an application,
make sure the printer driver installed supports them. If
not, contact your application manufacturer for a driver
that supports them.
Removing an Optional Card Font or Emulation
To remove an installed option from a hard disk, you need the
original font or emulation card containing the files. Use the
following procedure:
8 - 4 8
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
1. Make sure the printer is off line. Press the Menukey to display
CONFIGURATION
ADMINISTRATION
2. Press the Select key to enter the Administration menu; then
press the Next key to display
ADMINISTRATION
DISK OPERATIONS
3. Press the Select key to enter the Disk Operations submenu.
Then press the Next key to display
DISK OPERATIONS
REMOVE OPTION
4. Press the Select key to enter the Remove Option submenu.
Press theNext keyuntiltheaddressoftheharddisk containing
the optional font or emulation displays in the message
window, then press the Select key.
5. When you are prompted, insert the card into the card slot. The
printer compares the contents of the disk with the contents of
the card and deletes the matching files from the hard disk.
6. When the file removal process is complete, press the Menu
key to exit the menu.
7. To remove the card, use the following procedure:
a. If you are removing an LN03 Plus or a ProCollection card, turn
off the printer. Otherwise, make sure the printer is off line (use
the Online/Offline key to turn off the LED).
b. Pull the card out gently.
c. Turn on the printer, if it’s off, and put it back on line.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Formatting the Internal Hard Disk
If you experience unexplained or erratic problems with the internal
hard disk, you may want to reformat the hard disk and reload the
print system software.
NOTE: If you reformat the internal hard disk, all files on that disk
are erased, and the system software and fonts must be
reloaded.
To format the internal hard disk, follow these instructions:
1. Turn off the printer and then on again. The following message
displays in the window:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
READY TO BOOT
2. Once this message appears, you have 10 seconds to press the
Select key. When you press the Select key, the following
message appears in the message window:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
BOOT SYSTEM
NOTE: If 10 seconds passes before you press the Select key,
the IDLEmessage appears. You must return to step 1.
3. Press the Next key until FORMAT DISK appears on the
second line of the message window:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
FORMAT DISK
4. Press the Select key to enter the Format Disk submenu. Then
press the Next key until the following message appears in the
message window:
FORMAT DISK
DISK 6
8 - 5 0
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
5. Disk 6 is the printer’s internal hard disk. Press the Select key.
The following message displays:
FORMAT
ARE YOU SURE?
NOTE: If you decide not to format the internal hard disk,
press the Menu key to back out of the submenus. When you
reach the top level, you can use the Next or Previous key to
select the menu you want.
6. Press the Selectkeyto begin formatting.Themessagewindow
displays:
FORMAT DISK
FORMATTING
Then when formatting is finished, the message window
displays:
FORMAT DISK
COMPLETED
7. Press the Menu key until the following message appears:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
INSTALL TO DISK
8. Go to the next section for information on reinstalling the
system software and fonts.
Installing Print System Software and Fonts
NOTE: The system software and fonts provided with the
magicolor LX printer will not function in other versions
of the magicolor printer (such as the magicolor or the
magicolor Plus). If magicolor LX software or fonts are
downloaded to a non-magicolor LX printer, an error
message will appear on the start-up page.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Print system software and font backup disks are supplied with the
printer in case you ever need to reinstall them. For example, if the
printer’s internal hard disk is reformatted, the system software and
fonts will need to be reinstalled.
The procedure for downloading system software depends on
whether the printer software is functional (the printer starts up
normally and IDLE appears in the message window) or
non-functional (the system software cannot start up), and whether
you are sending from a PC or a Macintosh. Printer fonts wouldonly
ever need to be reinstalled if the printer software is not functional.
NOTE: When you reload the system software, the printer
configuration is returned to its factory default settings, so
you may want to print out an advanced status page from
the Administration/Special Pages submenu so you have
a record of current configuration-menu settings. See
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” of your User’s Guide
for information on using the configuration menu..
Installing System Softwarefrom a PC toa Functional
Printer
1. Make sure you have PS Executive Series printer utilities
(provided on a disk with your printer) installed on your PC.
Installation instructions are in the README file on the PS
Exec disk.
2. Make sure the printer is on and that the system software is
functioning normally (IDLE appears in the message
window). If the system software is not functioning, see
“Installing System Software and Fonts from a PC to a
Non-Functional Printer,” below.
3. Insert the System Software/DOS disk (provided with your
printer) into your PC’s floppy disk drive.
8 - 5 2
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
4. At the DOS C:\ prompt, type the following commands to
extract the system software file to your PC’s hard disk:
NOTE: This file takes up about 2.5 MB of disk space when
extracted.
md \qmssys↵
cd \qmssys↵
a:system↵
If the system software disk is in another floppy disk drive,
substitute the name of that drive for a.
5. At the DOS C:\QMSSYS prompt, type the following
command to make sure the SYSTEM.DL file is in the
QMSSYS directory:
dir↵
6. Start PS Exec.
7. Choose Download System Code from the PS Exec File menu.
The Download System Code dialog box appears.
8. In the Download System Code dialog box, find and select
SYSTEM.DL.
9. Choose the Send button to start the download.
When downloading is complete, IDLE appears on the
printer’s message window.
10. When the software has finished installing, turn the printer off
and on again to activate the new code.
11. At the DOS C:\QMSSYS prompt, type the following
command to delete the SYSTEM.DL file from the QMSSYS
directory:
del *.dl↵
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Installing System Software and Fonts from a PC to a
Non-Functional Printer
Follow these instructions to download system software and fonts
from a PC to a non-functional printer:
NOTE: These files take up about 5.5 MB of disk space when
extracted.
1. Insert the System Software/DOS disk (provided with your
printer) into your PC’s floppy disk drive.
2. At the DOS C:\ prompt, type the following command to
extract the system software file to your PC’s hard disk:
md \qmssys↵
cd \qmssys↵
a:system↵
If the system software disk is in another drive, substitute the
name of that drive for a.
3. InserttheSystemFonts 1/DOSdiskinto yourPC’sfloppydisk
drive.
4. Type the following command to extract the first PostScript
fonts file to your PC’s hard disk:
a:af2psfn1↵
5. InserttheSystemFonts 2/DOSdiskinto yourPC’sfloppydisk
drive.
6. Type the following command to extract the second PostScript
fonts file to your PC’s hard disk:
a:af2psfn2↵
7. Insert the PCL 5 Fonts/DOS disk into your PC’s floppy disk
drive.
8 - 5 4
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
8. Type the following command to extract the PCL 5 fonts file
to your PC’s hard disk:
a:af2pclfn↵
9. At the DOS C:\QMSSYS prompt, type the following
command to make sure these files are in the QMSSYS
directory: SYSTEM.DL, AF2PSFN1.DL, AF2PSFN2.DL,
and AF2PCLFN.DL:
dir↵
10. Turn the printer off and then on again. The following message
displays in the window:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
READY TO BOOT
11. Immediately press the Select key (before this message
disappears). When you press the Select key, the following
message appears in the message window:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
BOOT SYSTEM
NOTE: If 10 seconds passes before you press the Select key,
the IDLEmessage appears, and you must return to step 2.
12. Press the Next key until INSTALL TO DISKappears on the
second line of the message window:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
INSTALL TO DISK
13. Press the Select key to enter the Install to Disk submenu. Then
press the Next key until the name of the communication port
you’re using appears in the second line of the message
window, for example:
INSTALL TO DISK
PARALLEL
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
14. Press theSelectkeyto enter thecommunicationportsubmenu.
The following appears on the second line of the message
window:
TARGET DISK 6
15. Press the Select key. The following message appears in the
window:
INSTALL TO DISK
CONNECTING....
16. At your PC, at the C:\QMSSYS prompt, send the files you just
extracted to the parallel port using the DOS copy command
with the /b (binary file) option:
copy /b *.dl lpt1:↵
The software is installed when the following message
appears:
INSTALL TO DISK
COMPLETE
Once you have completed installing the system software, you
are ready to restart the system as described here:
17. Press the Menu key. The message window displays the
following message:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
INSTALL TO DISK
18. Press the Next key until the message window displays the
following message:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
BOOT SYSTEM
19. Press the Select key to enter the Boot System submenu. The
following message appears in the message window:
8 - 5 6
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
BOOT SYSTEM
HARD DISK
20. Press the Select key and the following message appears:
BOOT SYSTEM
HARD DISK 6
21. Press the Select key. The system begins loading, and the
following message displays:
BOOT SYSTEM
LOADING
22. At this point, DO NOT TOUCH ANY KEYS until the
following message appears:
IDLE
NOTE: If you do touch some keys during this step, you must
go back to step 9 and start from there again.
23. At the DOS C:\QMSSYS prompt, type the following
command to delete the system and font files from your PC’s
hard disk:
del *.dl↵
Installing System Software from a Macintosh to a
Functional Printer
NOTE: This installation procedure uses the LocalTalk port.
1. Turnon the printerandwaitforIDLEtoappear in the message
window.
If the current printer system software is not functioning, see
“Installing System Software and Fonts from a Macintosh to a
Non-Functional Printer,” below.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
2. Make sure you have PS Executive Series utilities (provided
on a disk with your printer) installed on your Macintosh.
Installation instructions are in the README file on the PS
Exec disk.
3. Usethefollowing procedureto decompresstheSystemLoader
program and install it on your Macintosh’s hard disk:
a. Insert the System Software/Macintosh disk (provided with your
printer) in your Macintosh’s floppy disk drive.
b. Double-click the SystemLoader icon.
c. Specify a folder when the program asks for a place to install
SystemLoader.
d. Choose the Save button.
4. Start PS Exec.
5. Choose Download System Code from the PS Exec File menu.
The Download System Code dialog box appears.
6. In the Download SystemCode dialogbox, find SystemLoader
and select it.
7. Choose the Send button to start the download.
When downloading is complete, the message “Download
Complete!”appears on the Macintosh screen, and IDLE
appears on the printer’s message window.
8. Restart the printer to activate the new system software.
Installing System Software and Fonts from a Macin-
tosh to a Non-Functional Printer
If the current printer system software is not functioning, you must
connect your Macintosh to the printer’s serial port to reinstall the
system software and the printer fonts. The download will not work
over the LocalTalk interface in this case. Your Macintosh vendor
8 - 5 8
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
can provide you with a cable (with DIN-8 female and DB-25 male
connectors) for this, or you can see appendix B, “Technical
Specifications,” for the correct cable pinouts.
NOTE: If you have access to a PC, printer system software and
fonts can also be downloaded from the PC to the printer’s
parallel or serial port. See “Installing System Software
and Fonts from a PC to a Non-Functional Printer,” earlier
in this chapter, for instructions.
1. Connect the printer serial port to the Macintosh’s printer or
modem port. The modem port provides the fastest download.
2. Usethefollowing procedureto decompresstheSystemLoader
program and install it on your Macintosh’s hard disk:
a. Insert the System Software/Macintosh disk (provided with your
printer) in your Macintosh’s floppy disk drive.
b. Double-click the SystemLoader icon.
c. Specify a folder when the program asks for a place to install
SystemLoader.
d. Choose the Save button.
3. Turnthe printer off and then on again. Waituntil thefollowing
message displays in the message window:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
READY TO BOOT
Then immediately press the Select key. The following
message appears:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
*BOOT SYSTEM
4. Press the Next key until INSTALL TO DISK appears on the
second line of the message window:
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 5 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
INSTALL TO DISK
5. Press the Select key to enter the Install to Disk submenu.
6. Press the Next key until SERIALappears in the second line
of the message window:
INSTALL TO DISK
SERIAL
7. Press the Select key to enter the Serial submenu. The
following message appears:
SERIAL
TARGET DISK 6
8. Press the Select key. The following message appears in the
window:
INSTALL TO DISK
CONNECTING....
9. At the Macintosh, start SystemLoader from your hard disk by
double-clicking the SystemLoader icon.
10. Inthedialogboxthatappears, make surethe correct download
port is selected; then choose the Send button to start the
download.
When the downloading process is complete, the message
“Download Complete!” appears on the Macintosh
screen and the following appears in the printer message
window:
INSTALL TO DISK
COMPLETE
Now use the following procedure to install the printer
PostScript fonts:
8 - 6 0
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
11. At the printer control panel, press the Menu key. The
following appears in the printer message window:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
INSTALL TO DISK
12. Press the Select key to enter the Install to Disk submenu.
13. Press the Next key until SERIALappears in the second line
of the message window:
14. Press the Select key to enter the SERIAL submenu. The
following message appears:
SERIAL
TARGET DISK 6
15. Press the Select key. The following message appears in the
window:
INSTALL TO DISK
CONNECTING....
16. At the Macintosh, insert the disk labeled System Fonts
1/Macintosh (shipped with your printer) in your Macintosh’s
floppy disk drive.
17. Start FontLoader from the floppy disk drive by
double-clicking the FontLoader icon.
NOTE: It’s not necessary to copy FontLoader to the hard drive.
This does not speed up the downloading process.
18. Inthedialogboxthatappears, make surethe correct download
port is selected; then choose the Send button.
When the font downloading is complete, the message
“Download Complete!” appears on the Macintosh
screen and the following appears in the printer message
window:
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 6 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
INSTALL TO DISK
COMPLETE
19. Repeat steps 11 through 18 to install the rest of the printer
fonts on the disk labeled System Fonts 2/Macintosh.
20. When the system software and fonts are loaded use the
following procedure to restart the printer:
a. At the printer control panel, press the Menu key. The following
appears in the printer message window:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
INSTALL TO DISK
b. Press the Next key until the message window displays the
following message:
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x
BOOT SYSTEM
c. Press the Select key to enter the Boot System submenu. The
following message appears in the message window:
BOOT SYSTEM
HARD DISK
d. Press the Select key and the following message appears:
BOOT SYSTEM
HARD DISK 6
e. Press the Select key. The system begins loading, and the
following message displays:
BOOT SYSTEM
LOADING
At this point, DO NOT TOUCH ANY KEYS until the following
message appears in the printer message window:
IDLE
8 - 6 2
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
NOTE: If you do touch some keys during this step, you must go
back to step 20a and start from there again.
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
8 - 6 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
♦
8 - 6 4
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Introduction
This chapter explains how to deal with control panel messages,
remove jams, cancel jobs, and troubleshoot printer problems.
Responding to Status Messages
The following status messages may appear in the control panel
message window:
x ACTIVE
JOBS
The printer is on line, and one or more jobs are in
progress. The x is replaced by the number of jobs in the
queue.
ADJUST
xxxxx BIN
A media cassette is either not installed or installed
incorrectly. The xxxxx indicates the cassette in
question. Either install or reinstall the indicated
cassette.
BACK PANEL The back coverover the transferunit is notfully closed.
OPEN
Close the back cover.
BELT
The OPC belt cartridge is either not installed or
CARTRIDGE incorrectly installed. Either install a cartridge if one is
MIS- not present or reinstall the current one correctly. (See
INSTALLED chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative
Maintenance,” for information on replacing the OPC
belt cartridge.)
CANCELLING The Cancel key has been used to cancel the current job.
JOB
This message is displayed until the job is cancelled.
CHECK
WASTE
TONER
The waste toner pack is full and needs to be replaced
or is not installed properly. See “Replacing the Waste
Toner Pack” in chapter 6 for details.
CLOSE
MANUAL
The manual feed tray is open when a file is being sent
to print from another cassette. Close the manual feed
FEED TRAY tray.
x DEV LOW
A developer cartridge is running low and needs to be
replaced. Thex is replaced by thecolorofthe developer
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
cartridge that needs attention. After installing the new
cartridge, you have to clear this message through the
control panel using the Clear Warning option. (See
chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative
Maintenance,” for details on replacing the developer
cartridge and “Administration/Engine” in chapter 4 for
details on clearing the warning.)
x DEVELOPER A developer cartridge is not installed or installed
UNIT MIS- incorrectly. The x is replaced by the color of the
INSTALLED developer unit that needs attention. Either install a
developer cartridge if one is not present or reinstall the
current one correctly. (See chapter 6, “Consumables
and Preventative Maintenance,” for information on
replacing the developer cartridge.)
FUSER
OIL LOW
The oil bottle for the fuser unit is running low. If you
have a new bottle on hand, you may want to change the
bottle now. (See chapter 6, “Consumables and
Preventative Maintenance,” for information on
replacing the oil bottle.) If not, order a replacement
bottle now. A limited number of copies (approximately
100) will still run. However, when the oil runs out, the
printer stops and the FUSER OIL EMPTY status
message appears.
FUSER
OIL EMPTY
The oil bottle for the fuser unit is empty. The printer
will not run anymore copies until the bottle is replaced.
(See chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative
Maintenance,” for information on replacing the oil
bottle.)
IDLE
No jobs are in progress.
IDLE INPUT The system is on line and printing previously accepted
PRINTING
jobs. No new jobs are arriving at the communication
interfaces.
INNER
JAM
Media has jammed leavingtheOPC beltcartridge area.
Remove the jam (see the “Inner Jam” section later in
this chapter for details).
INITIALIZING The printer is warming up and getting ready to go on
line.
9 - 2
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
MISFEED
JAM
Mediahasjammed leaving themedia cassette. Remove
the jam (see the “Misfeed Jam” section later in this
chapter for details).
OUTER
JAM
Media has jammed leaving the paper exit unit. Remove
the jam (see the “Outer Jam” section later in this
chapter for details).
PRINTING
STATUS
A status page has been requested via the Print Status
option in the Administration/Special Pages menu. This
does not necessarily mean that the status page is
printing at the particular moment the message is
displayed since other jobs may be ahead of it in the job
queue.
PRINTING
TEST
A sample page or a registration page has been
requested. This does not necessarily mean that the page
is printing as the messageis being displayed (other jobs
may be ahead of it in the job queue).
PUT xxxxxx
PAPER IN
A media cassette is empty; reload the cassette. xxxxxx
PAPER is the media size the cassette is currently
xxxxx INPUT configured for. xxxxx INPUT BIN is the empty
BIN
cassette. (See chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily
Operations,” for information on refilling cassettes.)
REPLACE
BELT
The OPC belt cartridge needs to be replaced. After
installing the new cartridge, you have to clear this
message through the control panel using the Clear
Warning option. (See chapter 6, “Consumables and
Preventative Maintenance,”for details onreplacingthe
OPC belt cartridge and “Administration/Engine” in
chapter 4 for details on clearing the warning.)
SIDE PANEL The waste toner cover is not fully closed. Close the
OPEN cover.
TOP COVER The top cover of the printer is either off or partially
OPEN
open. Make sure it is seated properly and fully closed.
x TONER
EMPTY
A toner cartridge is empty. The x is replaced by the
color of the toner cartridge that needs to be replaced.
(See chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative
Maintenance,” for information on replacing a toner
cartridge.)
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
WAITING ON The printer compiler is waiting on incoming data for
INPUT
END JOB?
the first job in the job queue. It is possible that the job
did not end with an end-of-job indicator and therefore
cannot end by itself. The message is displayed in case
you want to cancel the job or send an end-of-job
indicator. Themessage disappears if moreinputarrives
from the port, if the relevant specified timeout elapses,
or if you send an end-of-job indicator. No other jobs
can be printed until this job has ended.
WARMING
UP
The printer is warming up; the fuser is at a low
temperature. Wait until the printer has warmed up
before you print.
Service Call Messages
CALL FOR
SERVICE
A mechanical error has occurred and a service call is
required. Before calling for service, make a note of the
full message in the message window. See appendix A,
“QMS Customer Support,” for information on how to
contact QMS. When a CALL FOR SERVICE x
appears, the printer stops until the required service is
complete.
100K
CHECKUP
Approximately 100,000 copies have been printed. It’s
time for periodicmaintenance and parts replacement to
protect your printer and maintain print quality.
REPLACE
FUSER
Approximately 60,000 copies have been printed. It’s
time to replace the fuser to ensure print quality and
reduce wear on your printer.
The 100K CHECKUPand the REPLACE FUSERmessages can
be cleared through the Clear Warning option in the
Administration/Engine menu. Then, you can continue to use the
printer. (See “Administration/Engine” in chapter 4 for details on
clearing the warning.)
CAUTION: We strongly recommend that you have the fuser
replaced or the 100,000 copy checkup done as soon as possible
after a message appears. If you clear one of these messages, the
9 - 4
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
counter that tracks that particular service resets to 0 and the mes-
sage does not reappear until after another complete cycle. If you
continue to use the printer without the proper maintenance or part
replacement, print quality can deteriorate and the wear on the
printer can shorten the printer’s life.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Clearing Media Jams
When a jam occurs, the message window on the control panel
displays one of three messages, MISFEED JAM, INNER JAM,
or OUTER JAM. The following sections contain procedures for
clearing each type of jam.
Clearing Misfeed Jams
When the control panel message window displays MISFEED
JAM,media has jammed while leaving the media cassette or the
manual feed tray. To clear this jam, use the following procedure:
1. Pull out the media cassette (fig. 9.1), and check the
media-cassette slot. If media is there, skip to step 4. If not,
continue to step 2.
Fig. 9.1 Remove the Paper Cassette
9 - 6
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
2. Locate the manual-feed platform: it’s a black plastic tray at
the top of the media-cassette slot.
3. Remove the manual-feed platform by lifting it up and forward
at the front until it drops out (fig. 9.2).
Fig. 9.2 Remove Top Tray of Cassette Slot
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
4. Remove any jammed media you see (fig. 9.3).
Fig. 9.3 Remove the Jammed Media
5. Check to be sure no other pieces of media are lodged farther
back in the slot. Then, if you removed the manual-feed
platform, replace it. (Push it back into the printer until it is
secure.)
6. Make sure the media in the cassette is in good condition, lies
flat, and does not exceed the upper-limit mark on the cassette.
7. Slide the cassette back into the printer until it’s secure.
8. Open and close the top cover to clear the jam message in the
control panel window.
When the control panel message window displays IDLE, the
printer is ready to print.
9 - 8
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Clearing Inner Jams
When the control panel message window displays INNER JAM,
media has jammed leaving the OPC belt cartridge, and the leading
edge has jammed around the transfer area. To clear this jam, use
the following procedure:
1. Openthe backcoverbypressingthe top-right cornerto release
the spring latch (fig. 9.4).
Fig. 9.4 Open the Back Cover
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
2. Open the transfer unit by grasping it in the center by the green
handle and pulling it toward you and down (fig. 9.5).
Fig. 9.5 Open the Transfer Unit
NOTE: To avoid damage to the rollers, always remove
jammed media gently. Also, toner images on the media aren’t
fused (set), which means toner is still loose. Avoid getting
toner on your hands and clothes while removing the jammed
media. If you accidentally get toner on your hands or clothes,
lightly dust off as much as possible. If some toner remains,
use cool, not hot water, to rinse it off your hands or washable
clothing.
9 - 1 0
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
3. Remove the jammed media if the media is around the drum
by using the following procedure. Otherwise, skip to step 4.
a. Open the manual feed tray by pressing the top, right corner (fig.
9.6).
Fig. 9.6 Open the Manual Feed Tray
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
b. Pull up the green handle on the OPC belt cartridge and then pull
the cartridge out about 2" (5 cm) to relieve tension on the drum.
c. Remove the media from the transfer unit end of the printer (fig.
9.7).
Fig. 9.7 Remove the Jammed Media
d. Close the transfer unit and the back cover.
e. Firmly push the OPC belt cartridge back into the printer until it
snaps into place. The cartridge is in place when you can see the
green arrows on the left and right inside metal frame of the
printer. Then, push down the green handle to lock the OPC
cartridge in place, and close the manual feed tray.
f. Skip to step 5.
4. Remove the jammed media if the media is around the fuser
roller by using the following procedure.
9 - 1 2
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
WARNING!
The fuser unit is hot! Do not remove a jam in this
area until the fuser unit cools.
ACHTUNG!
Die Fixiereinheit wird sehr heiß! Bitte achtenSie
darauf, daß sie diese einige Zeit abkühlen lassen, bevor Sie
einen Papierstau beseitigen.
a. Open the paper exit unit. (See “Installing the Cleaning Pad and
Oil Bottle” in chapter 2 if you are not sure how to do this.)
b. Remove the jammed media by pulling it straight out from above
the transfer unit (fig. 9.8).
Fig. 9.8 Remove Media from the Transfer Unit Area
5. Close the transfer unit, and then the back cover.
6. Close the paper exit unit.
When the control panel message window displays IDLE, the
printer is ready to print.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Clearing Outer Jams
When the control panel message window displays OUTER JAM,
media has jammed leaving the paper exit unit. To clear this jam,
use the following procedure:
1. Openthe backcoverbypressingthe top-right cornerto release
the spring latch (fig. 9.9).
2. Open the transfer unit by grasping the green handle in the
center and pulling it toward you and down (fig. 9.9).
Fig. 9.9 Open the Transfer Unit
WARNING!
The fuser unit is hot! Do not remove a jam in this
area until the fuser unit cools.
ACHTUNG!
Die Fixiereinheit wird sehr heiß! Bitte achtenSie
darauf, daß sie diese einige Zeit abkühlen lassen, bevor Sie
einen Papierstau beseitigen.
9 - 1 4
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
3. Open the paper exit unit (fig. 2.13).
4. Open the pressure-release lever on the fuser unit (fig. 9.10).
Fig. 9.10 Open the Pressure-Release Lever
CAUTION: If you can see the outer jam in the transfer unit, always
remove it by pulling the media out through the transfer unit, not up
and out the paper exit unit. This prevents the unfused toner from
coming off on the exit rollers and getting down into the printer.
Sincetoner imagesonthemediaaren’tset, avoidgetting loosetoner
on your hands and clothes while removing the jammed media. If
you accidentally get toner on your hands or clothes, lightly dust off
as much as possible. If some toner remains, use cool, not hot water,
to rinse it off your hands or washable clothing. To avoid damage
to the rollers, always remove jammed media gently.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
5. Remove the jammed media by pulling it straight out from
above the transfer unit (fig. 9.11).
Fig. 9.11 Remove the Jammed Media
6. Close the transfer unit, and then the back cover.
7. Close the pressure release lever on the fuser unit.
8. Close the paper exit unit.
When the control panel message window displays IDLE, the
printer is ready to print.
9 - 1 6
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
If the Media Jam Message Stays On
1. If a jam message displays in the control panel message
window, clear the jam using the appropriate procedure from
the “Clearing Media Jams” section earlier in this chapter. If
the message is still there, make sure cassettes have the correct
size media, the size key slide on the back end of the cassette
is set correctly, and all covers and doors are completely
closed.
2. If the message displays when no jam is evident, make sure the
printer is configured for the media size and type currently in
the cassette. (See chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily
Operations,” or chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” to learn
how to use the Paper and the Media keys.)
3. As a last resort, try turning the printer off and on (this will
cause jobs to be lost).
Jam Recovery
The printer has automatic jam recovery, so if a media jam occurs,
once you remove the jammed media, the printer reprints the
jammed page and then continues with the print job, as long as the
printer power has not been turned off. The Jam Recovery option is
located in the Administration/Engine section of the printer
configuration menu.
NOTE: Because jam recovery requires system memory, it can
slow print jobs.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Preventing Media Jams
Some printer problems are caused by improper handling of media
or use of the wrong media and consumables. The following section
provides information about correctly handling media and
preventing jams.Several things you can do to reduce print media
jamming in your printer are
■ Set the printer for the print media type and size currently
in the cassette. (See chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily
Operations,”orchapter4,“PrinterConfiguration,” to learn
how to use the Tray Select and Media keys.)
■ Use QMS supplied toner and developer, and use
QMS-recommended print media (See appendix B,
“Technical Specifications.”)
■ Make sure print media is not torn, folded, or wrinkled.
■ Do not overfill the media cassette: it holds 250 sheets of
paper, 50 transparencies, or label stock up to the
upper-limit mark on the cassette.
NOTE: If the printer is operating in a low-humidity
environment, we recommend printing fewer than 20
consecutive transparencies to prevent jamming.
■ If you have problems with double feeding, remove the
paper from the cassette and fan the edges. The sheets may
be sticking together. (However, do not fan transparencies;
this can create electrostatic buildup that can cause
jamming.)
■ Store print media away from moisture and humidity.
Moisture and humidity may cause media to turn up at the
edges or wrinkles to occur. The recommended relative
humidity during operation is 60%-70%.
9 - 1 8
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
■ Load media printing side up, top edge first. The printing
side of media is indicated on the wrapping, so leave it in
its wrapping until you are ready to load it.
■ Keep the paper-feed rollers and the manual-feed belts
clean. Dirtyrollersand beltscandrawmedia unevenly into
the printer. See “Cleaning the Paper-Feed Roller and the
Manual-Feed Belts” in chapter 6, “Consumables and
Preventive Maintenance.”
Preventing Envelope Jams
To prevent envelope jams
■ Keep envelopes in their original box to protect them until
they’re used. Don’t use damaged envelopes.
■ Store envelopes in a low-humidity environment.
■ Use only the envelope types specified in “Media
Handling” in appendix B, “Technical Specifications.”
Don’t use envelopes with windows.
■ If you’re using the optional envelope cassette, use it in the
standard cassette slot (not the optional feeder), and don’t
place more than 30 envelopes in the cassette at once.
Internal Hard Disk Problems
If you experience unexplained or erratic problems with the internal
hard disk, you may want to reformat the hard disk and reload the
print system software. See chapter 8, “Printer Options,” for
information.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Miscellaneous Problems: A Quick Check
If you have just installed your printer and are having problems, be
sure you have correctly followed the setup steps outlined in chapter
2, “Initial Printer Setup,” and chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer.”
Then, check the following:
1. Is there a status message in the control panel window?
If so, go to question 2.
If not, check the following:
■ Is the power cord plugged into both the power outlet and
the printer?
■ Are both power switches on?
■ Is the power outlet working?
■ Does the line voltage from the power outlet match the
printer’spowerrequirements? See appendixB,“Technical
Specifications.”
2. Can you print a status page? (This option is located in the
Administration/Special Pages menu.)
If so, go to question 3.
If not, check the following:
■ Is the printer off line before you try to enter the menu? It
should be.
■ Is the cassette empty? If it is out of media, the message
PUT xxxxxx PAPER IN xxxxx BINis displayed
in the control panel message window and the Message
LED is lit.
9 - 2 0
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
■ Is the toner or developer depleted?
■ Are all printer doors and covers closed securely?
■ Is there a media jam?
3. Is the printer receiving data from the computer? If the Data
LED blinks after sending the file, the printer is receiving the
data.
If so, go to question 4.
If not, check the following:
■ Are the interface cables securely fastened?
■ Is the printer on line? The Online LED should be lit.
■ Is your application set correctly? Are the communication
parameters the same as those on your host and printer?
■ If you are using the serial interface, is the baud rate (speed
of data transmission) of the printer, the computer, andyour
application the same?
■ If you still cannot identify the problem, contact your QMS
vendor.
4. Is the printer printing codes or not printing at all when in ESP
mode?
■ Reconfigure the port for the emulation in which you are
trying to print. See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for
information on configuring the printer.
■ If ASCII or text files won’t print, make sure the ESP
Default option (in the Administration/Emulations menu)
is set to PCL5, the factory default.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
■ If you continue to have problems with the ESP mode
selecting printer emulation, contact your QMS vendor.
IBM PC and Compatible Computer Checklist
If you are experiencing problems with printing from a PC (not
related to print quality), check the following:
■ Does your application setup match the printer interface
settings?
■ Have yousetup yourprinter portatthesystemlevel(DOS)
and installed a color PostScript driver within your
application? (Refer to your DOS, Windows, and
application documentation.)
■ Do you need an end-of-job for the previous job?
■ If you are using a serial interface, are you experiencing a
protocol problem? Set the printer to DTR/DSR protocol.
If that does not work, check your serial interface cable.
You mayalsowant to try setting the printer to XON/XOFF
protocol.
■ Does your application support color PostScript Level 2?
(Check the application manual. If your application
supports color PostScript Level 1 but not Level 2, try
setting the printer to Level 1 in the Administration/
Emulations/PostScript/Emulation Level menu.)
Apple Macintosh Checklist
If you are experiencing problems with printing from a Macintosh
(not related to print quality), check the following:
9 - 2 2
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
■ Is the printer properly connected via LocalTalk-type cable
and transformer boxes? (See chapter 3, “Connecting the
Printer,” for information.)
■ Is LaserWriter (and Laser Prep, if you are using
LaserWriter6.0.xorlater)installedin yourSystemFolder?
■ IntheChooser, haveyou selectedtheLaserWriter icon and
highlighted the correct printer?
■ Is AppleTalk active in the Chooser dialog box?
■ Are the screen fonts installed?
■ Is your application compatible with color PostScript Level
2? (Check the application manual. If your application
supports color PostScript Level 1 but not Level 2, try
setting the printer to Level 1 in the Administration/
Emulations/PostScript/Emulation Level menu.)
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Mechanical Problems
Control Panel Selections Don’t Take Effect
■ Make sure you’re saving menu selections before exiting
the menu. (See “Saving Configuration Selections” in
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration.”)
■ Some configuration selections do not take effect until the
printer has been rebooted. Look in chapter 4, “Printer
Configuration,” to see if the selection you are making
requires a reboot.
Data LED Stays Lit
After the printer warms up, if the Data LED stays on, two problems
may exist.
1. If you are downloading additional fonts, too many can
overload the printer’s memory causing the printer to reset and
lose information previously downloaded to RAM. Make sure
you have enough printer memory for the additional fonts.
Additional memory (RAM) is available and easily installed.
Contact your QMS vendor for informationonRAMupgrades.
See chapter 8, “Printer Options.”
2. On an AppleTalk network, Macintosh computers sometimes
interfere with each other. If this happens often, check all the
Macintosh computers on the network to make sure they are
using the same version of LaserWriter and Laser Prep. If
neither of these files is the problem, contact your QMS
vendor.
No Start-up Page
If no start-up page prints, check the following:
9 - 2 4
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
1. Is the printer on line?
2. Has the start-up page been disabled? Check the Do Start Page
option in the Administration/Startup Options menu to make
sure the start-up page is on. If the start-up page is turned on,
go to step 3.
3. Turn the printer off, then back on. It takes approximately 4
minutes for the printer to warm up from a cold start or less
than aminute from a warmstart. Be sureyou wait longenough
for a start-up page to print before suspecting a problem.
4. Check to be sure the media cassette is in place and secure.
5. Check for a media jam. See “Clearing Media Jams” earlier in
this chapter for details.
6. Make sure all toner and developer cartridges are installed and
not depleted.
7. Make sure the fuser oil is not depleted.
If you have not solved the problem and no status message displays,
call your QMS vendor for help.
Printer Resets
1. Different versions of LaserWriter and Laser Prep being used
on a network can cause printer reinitialization.
2. Downloading too many fonts can overload the printer’s
memory and cause the printer to reset to default. Additional
memory (RAM) is availableand easilyinstalled. Contact your
QMS vendor for information on RAM upgrades. See chapter
8, “Printer Options.”
3. If the printer resets in other circumstances, call your QMS
vendor for service.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Printer Locks Up
If the INITIALIZINGmessage remains in the message window,
and you are not be able to enter the Configuration menu or print
even after you turn the printer off and on again, the printer has
probably been incorrectly configured. You can reset to factory
defaults by simultaneously holding down the Select and
Online/Offline key (for about 10 seconds) while turning the printer
off and on again. The reset process takes several minutes to
complete.
Blank Pages
1. Check for a status message to be sure the printer is not out of
toner or developer.
2. Be sure you removed the sealing tapes on newly installed
toner and developer cartridges.
3. If no toner cartridges are empty and sealing tapes have been
removed, toner may have become packed down. Take the
toner cartridges out and gently shake them horizontally to
loosen the toner. Then, reinstall the cartridges, making sure
the cartridges go into the correct color slots. (See “Replacing
the Toner Cartridge” in chapter 6 for details.)
4. If these solutions do not work, contact your QMS vendor.
Not All Pages Print
1. Check your cable. You could have the wrong kind of cable,
or your printer may not be configured for the correct cable and
port.
2. Make sure no one pressed the Cancel key while your job was
printing.
3. Check the control panel message window to see if the media
cassette is empty.
9 - 2 6
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
4. Increase the emulation timeout (for HP PCL andHP-GL files)
or the PS wait timeout (for PostScript files).
5. If you are using a PC, make sure that the mode statement in
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file ends in a p so that print jobs are
sent until the printer accepts them:
mode lpt1:,,p
6. Send an end-of-job in case a previous job lacked this
command.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Print Quality Problems
Generally Poor Print Quality
■ Make sure the printer is set for the type of media (paper,
transparency film, or thick stock) you are printing on: use
the Media key on the printer’s control panel to tell the
printer whether paper or transparencies have been loaded
in the currently selected cassette. See chapter 4, “Printer
Configuration,” forinformationonusing thecontrolpanel.
■ Make sure the media is in good shape and meets all the
specifications in appendix B, “Technical Specifications.”
■ Remove the toner cartridges and shake them horizontally.
Toner can settle, and this procedure redistributes the toner.
Reinstall the cartridges in the printer and try to print again.
■ If the print appears too light or dark, change the print
density dial settings for the toner cartridges as necessary
(see “Adjusting Print Density” in chapter 5 for details).
Then, try reprinting.
NOTE: Changing the print density affects the resident
color management system and should be done only as a
last step to improve print quality.
See chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,” for more information
on optimizing print quality.
Specific Print Quality Problems
The following section addresses specific print quality problems.
Try the solutions in the sequence given. If these do not solve the
problem, place a service call.
9 - 2 8
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
600 dpi Jobs Print at 300 dpi
■ Make sure the printer is configured for 600 dpi.
See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for information.
■ Make sure you have enough RAM installed for the job you
are trying to print.
If your printer has 12 MB RAM, color documents print in
300 dpi. Monochrome documentscan beprinted in 600dpi
if you configure the printer for monochrome printing,
either through your application (if its driver, like the
QMS-provided Windows and Macintosh drivers, supports
this option) or through the printer control panel. You can
print color and monochrome documents in 600 dpi if you
install additional RAM in the printer. See appendix B,
“Technical Specifications,” for a chart showing RAM
requirements for different page sizes and numbers of
colors.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
White or Light Lines
■ Remove each toner cartridge, shake it as you do before
installing a new cartridge to redistribute toner, and then
reinstall the cartridge.
■ Install a new cartridge if necessary.
Light Image (Entire Page)
■ Increase the print density for any color(s) used on the page
(see “Adjusting Print Density” in chapter 5 for details).
■ Remove each toner cartridge for a color used on that page,
and shake it as you do before installing a new cartridge.
Then, reinstall the cartridge.
■ Install a new toner cartridge if necessary. (See “Replacing
a Toner Cartridge” in chapter 6 for details.)
Light Image on the Left or Right Side of the Page (all colors)
■ Make sure the printer is level (maximum 1° slant).
Dark Image (Entire Page)
■ Decreasetheprint density foranycolor(s)usedon thepage
(see “Adjusting Print Density” in chapter 5 for details).
■ Install a new cartridge if necessary. (See “Replacing a
Toner Cartridge” in chapter 6, “Consumables and
Preventative Maintenance,” for details.) The old cartridge
may be defective, releasing too much toner.
9 - 3 0
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Blurry Images, Scratches, or Missing Dots
■ Make sure the media is in good shape and meets all the
specifications in the “Media Handling” section of
Appendix B, “Technical Specifications.”
■ Check for a status message on the control panel. The toner
or developer may be low. Replace cartridges as necessary.
■ Make sure the paper path is clean. See the “Preventative
Maintenance” section in chapter 6, “Consumables and
Preventative Maintenance,” for details on cleaning the
charger unit, various rollers, and plates.
■ Check the OPC belt for dirt and scratches. Replace the
OPC belt cartridge if necessary. (See the “Replacing the
OPC Belt Cartridge” section in chapter 6.)
■ If whole blocks or portions of the page are missing, there
may be a mechanical problem; contact your QMS vendor.
Image is Not Centered on the Page
■ Make sure you aren’t printing outside the printer’s
imageable region for the media size you’re using (see
“Media Handling” in appendix B, “Technical
Specifications”). You may need to change to a larger size
media, or adjust the margin(s) through your application.
If images are not printing within the imageable area for the
pagesizeyou’re using, theprinter may be out ofalignment.
See “The Status Pages” in chapter 5, “Print Media and
Daily Operations,” for information on checking printer
alignment.
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Color Jobs (or Portions of Jobs) Print in Monochrome
■ Make sure you have enough RAM installed for the job you
are trying to print.
See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for a chart
showing RAM requirements for different page sizes and
numbers of colors.
■ If you’re printing legal-sized pages, note that there are
different imageable areas for black and color printing. See
“Media Handling” section of Appendix B, “Technical
Specifications.”
Colors Not Registering Properly
■ Check to make sure the printer is on a hard, level surface.
■ Check for damage to the OPC belt cartridge. Replace it if
necessary.
Smudges on the Back of Pages
■ Make sure the size key on the media cassette is set to the
right size for each job. Smudges can occur if the wrong
size was selected on the previous job causing the image to
print off the side of the page onto the transfer roller. If this
happens, run a few more pages through the printer to clean
off the remaining toner.
Dark Vertical Lines
■ Check the OPC belt cartridge. Something may be caught
under the cleaning blade or the cartridge may need to be
replaced. Install a new OPC belt cartridge.
9 - 3 2
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Sharp Horizontal Lines (across the feed direction)
■ Place a service call.
Partial Images or Image Too Small
■ Check the imageable regions for the size media you are
using (see “Media Handling” section of Appendix B,
“Technical Specifications”). Are you trying to print
outside of the imageable region of the page? If so, change
to a larger size media, or adjust the margin(s) through your
application.
■ The charger unit or various roller and plates may be dirty.
See “Preventative Maintenance” in chapter 6 for
instructions on how to clean these parts.
Smearing on Transparencies
■ Make sure the printer is set for transparency printing: use
the Media key on the printer’s control panel to tell the
printertransparenciesare in the currently selectedcassette.
See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for information on
using the control panel.
■ Make sure the transparency stock is in good shape and
meets all the specifications in the “Media Handling”
section of appendix B, “Technical Specifications.” Try
printinga fewtransparenciesatatimeandgivingthesheets
a chance to cool between prints.
■ Make sure the transparencies are loaded print side up and
the cassette is not overloaded (50 sheets or less, not over
the upper-limit mark inside the cassette).
■ Check the print density dials for the toner cartridges. Try
setting the dials in the middle (where the dot appears).
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
9 - 3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9
Placing a Service Call
If you have a problem you cannot resolve, contact your QMS
vendor. Your vendor is best equipped to immediately handle
problem you may encounter. If you cannot get service from your
vendor, see appendix A, “QMS Customer Support.”
♦
9 - 3 4
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
QMS Customer Support
Several sources of help and information are available, depending
on the type of help you need:
1. Your QMS printer vendor
Your localvendor(theonefromwhomyouboughttheprinter)
may be best equipped to help you. Your vendor has specially
trained service technicians available to answer questions, and
the equipment to analyze your printer problems.
2. Your application vendor
Sometimes “printing” problems have more to do with the
application being used than with the printer. In this case, the
application manufacturer is the best source of help.
3. Q-FAX
Q-FAX, a QMS information retrieval service, provides
applicationnotes,technicalsupportnotesoncommonprinting
problems, and information about printer specifications,
options, accessories, consumables, and prices.
In the United States and Canada, call (800) 633-7213 to reach
Q-FAX. In all other countries,call (334) 633-3850. Have your
fax number handy when you call (or place the call from your
fax machine’s handset).
You can choose to have either a directory (a list of currently
available documents on a particular topic) or a specific
document sent to you. The first time you call, request the
directory (press 2 on your phone or fax keypad when
prompted). Then call back to requestspecific documents. You
can order up to three documents per call.
4. The QMS Corporate Bulletin Board System (BBS)
Q M S C u s t o m e r S u p p o r t
A - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
The bulletin board contains technical support notes,
application notes, drivers, patches, and utilities, and you may
leavetechnical questionsnot requiring animmediate response
on electronic mail for the Sysop (System Operator). The
bulletin board [(334) 633-3632] operates at 1200, 2400, 9600,
and 14400 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, with
XMODEM, YMODEM,andZMODEMcapabilities. Contact
QMS Customer Technical Assurance for more information
about the bulletin board.
5. CompuServe
Through CompuServe, you can ask general (non-technical)
questions, share information with other users, and access
printing information and programs. When you use
CompuServe, type the following command to go directly to
the forum where QMS is located:
■ go qmsprint
The QMS library section contains application notes, printer
drivers, utilities, technical information, and announcement
files.
6. The Internet
The QMS server provides access to technical reports, new
product announcements, a trade show schedule, and other
general information about QMS. You can access the QMS
server via any of the web viewers available to Internet users.
If you don’t have access to a web viewer, we recommend the
NCSA Mosaic web viewer (Mosaic is at
ftp.ncsa.uiuc.edu).The QMS home page is at
http://www.qms.com/. The QMS ftp resource is ftp.qms.com.
7. QMS Customer Technical Assurance
QMS Customer Technical Assurance is available in the US
from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Central Standard Time, at (334)
633-4500. You can also fax questions to CTA at (334)
A - 2
Q M S C u s t o m e r S u p p o r t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
633-3716. Please indicate whether you would like a faxed or
a phoned reply.
If you call for assistance, have the following information
ready so our technicians can help you more quickly:
■ Your phone number, fax number, and shipping address
■ A description of the problem
■ The printer model and serial number
■ The type of host computer you are using
■ The type and version of operating system you are using
■ The interface you are using, and, if serial, the protocol
■ The application and version you are using
■ The printer language you are using
■ Your printer firmware version (listed on the status and
start-up pages)
If after consultation with CTA, you need to return the unit for
repairs or warranty work, please be sure to get an RMA (Return
Merchandise Authorization) number, since QMS cannot accept
warranty work without this number. CTA can connect you with
Customer Service to get this number.
QMS National Service
For information on service and maintenance of QMS and other
manufacturers’ printers, call (800) 762-8894. For information
about on-site service and depot repair, call (800) 858-1597. For
information on spare parts, call (334) 633-4300 ext. 2530.
Q M S C u s t o m e r S u p p o r t
A - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
QMS World-wide Offices
United States/ QMS, Inc.
Latin America One Magnum Pass
Mobile, AL 36618
USA
(334) 633-4300
E-mail: info@qms.com
Product Information: (800) 523-2696
OEM Information: (800) 631-2692
Consumables: (800) 777-7782
US Fax: (334) 633-4866
Latin America Fax: (334) 639-3347
Canada
QMS Canada, Inc.
9630 Rte. Trans-Canadienne
Saint-Laurent, Québec
H4S 1V9 Canada
Telephones: (514) 333-5940
(800) 361-3392
Fax: (514) 333-5949
National Service Canada: (800) 206-9234
Offices in Ottawa,
Québec City, Toronto,
and Vancouver
Europe,
Middle East,
Africa
Düsseldorf (49) 211/596 1333
London (44) (1) 784 442255
Maarssen (31) 3465 51 333
Paris (33) 1 4 107 9393
Stockholm (46) (8) 725 5680
Asia-Pacific
Hong Kong (852) 511 5300
Melbourne 61 (3) 899 5777
Sydney 61 (2) 901 3235
Tokyo (81) (3) 3437-4030
♦
A - 4
Q M S C u s t o m e r S u p p o r t
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Print Engine
Print Method Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black electrophotographic
recording with semiconductor laser. Dry toner, image
transfer to print media.
Resolution
The table below shows minimum RAM requirements
for different page sizes and numbers of colors (shaded
areas indicate printing capabilities with the standard 12
MB RAM):
Page Size
Dots per Minimum RAM Minimum
Inch
(Monochrome)
RAM
(Four-color)
Letter
Legal*
A4
300
600
300
600
300
600
300
600
300
600
12 MB
12 MB
12 MB
16 MB
12 MB
12 MB
12 MB
12 MB
12 MB
12 MB
12 MB
24 MB
16 MB
28 MB
12 MB
24 MB
12 MB
24 MB
12MB
20 MB
Executive
Envelopes
(DL and
Com 10)
*Although the monochrome imageable area for
legal-sized pages is 8.11" x 13.61" (205.90 mm x
345.60 mm), the full-color imageable region for this
size is limited to 8.11" x 11.7" (205.90 mm x 297.18
mm).
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
B - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Print Speed
12 pages per minute monochrome
6 pages per minute 2- or 3-color
3 pages per minute 4-color
(Assuming the use of letter or A4 size with 30% or less
toner coverage.)
Recom-
mended
5,000 color prints per month
20,000 monochrome prints per month
Duty Cycle
Warm-Up
Time
250 sec. maximum; 180 sec. average
Not more than 58 dB (A)
Noise Level
Engine
Switches
Main power switch (back of printer)
Remote power switch (front of printer)
Dimensions
Weight
20.5" W x 22.3" D x 14.6" H
520 mm W x 565 mm D x 370 mm H
Approximately 106 lbs (48 kg) without consumables
or options installed
Controller
Type
Intel 80960CF RISC-based controller operating at 33
MHz
Fonts
See chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,” for a list of
the resident fonts.
Emulations
PostScript Level 2
PostScript Level 1
HP-GL (7470A/7475A/7550A/ColorPro)
HP PCL 5C (HP XL 300)
Hexdump
Lineprinter
Optional emulations
Interfaces
LocalTalk, parallel, serial, SCSI, optional network
interface
See “Cable Pinouts,” later in this chapter, for more
information.
B - 2
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
SCSI
Supports optional SCSI disks, up to a 512 MB.
12 or 24 MB RAM (upgradable to 64 MB)
Standard
RAM
Internal Hard Disk
Size
80 MB IDE drive
(Upgradeable to 512 MB.)
Electrical Requirements
Power
Requirements
120 V ±10%
Frequency
Power
60 Hz (± 2Hz)
Standby
Consumption 1000 W max.; 150 W ave.
Operation
1000 W max.; 250 W ave.
Energy Saver Mode*
less than 45* W
*Available only on Energy Star models of the printer
when Energy Saver mode is enabled. See chapter 4,
“Printer Configuration,” for more information on
Energy Saver mode.
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
B - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Media Handling
Media
Sizes*
Size
Inches
Millimeters
Letter
Legal
A4
Executive 7.25 x 10.50
Com 10 9.50 x 4.125
8.50 x 11.00
8.50 x 14.00
8.27 x 11.69
215.90 x 279.40
215.90 x 355.60
210.00 x 297.00
185.00 x 267.00
241.30 x 104.78
220.00 x 110.00
DL
8.66 x 4.33
Imageable
Regions*
Size
Inches
Millimeters
Letter
Legal 1/C 8.11 x 13.61
Legal 4/C 8.11 x 11.7
8.11 x 10.61
205.90 x 269.40
205.90 x 345.60
205.90 x 297.18
200.00 x 287.00
175.00 x 257.00
233.30 x 98.78
212.00 x 104.00
A4
7.87 x 11.30
Executive 6.89 x 10.12
Com 10 9.19 x 3.89
DL
8.35 x 4.09
Margins*
Letter
Top
0.2"
Bottom
0.2"
Left
Right
0.2"
0.2"
Legal 1-Color 0.2"
Legal 4-Color 0.2"
0.2"
0.2"
0.2"
2.1"
0.2"
0.2"
A4
5 mm
5 mm
5 mm
0.12"
3 mm
5 mm
5 mm
0.16"
4 mm
5 mm
5 mm
0.16"
4 mm
Executive
Com 10
DL
5 mm
0.12"
3 mm
*All measurements are accurate within 0.02"/0.5 mm. See chapter
5, “Print Media and Daily Operations,” for more information on
media.
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
B - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Print Media Types, Weights, and Recommended Brands
Media Type
Weight
Brand
2
2
Plain Paper
60 to 90 g/m
16 to 24 lb
Xerox 4024
Laser Paper
60 to 90 g/m
16 to 24 lb
Hammermill Laser
Print (White)
2
Thick Stock
(manual-feed only)
up to 163 g/m
up to 43 lb
N/A
2
2
Transparencies
Labels
138 to 146 g/m
36.7 to 38.8 lb
3M PP2500, Xerox 3R
2780, Xerox 3R 3117
156 to 170 g/m
41.5 to 45.2 lb
Avery 5260
2
Envelopes
90 g/m
24 lb
CraftMaster, Velpa,
Sphinx White Wove
Sub 24, Auto Fil #1914
NOTE: Hammermill Paper offers free samples of its laser paper
in varying weights. In the US, call toll free (800)
242-2148.
Media Storage 63.5° to 80.6° Fahrenheit
(17.5° to 27° Celsius)
60% to 70% relative humidity
Media should be stored in its original wrapper, on a
flat surface, away from dust and sunlight
Paper Cas-
sette Capacity
250 sheets of paper
50 transparencies
Output Tray
Capacity
150 sheets
B - 6
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Consumables
Your QMS vendor can provide the consumables listed below for
your color printer. In the US, you can also call (800) 777-7782 to
order consumables. Keep in mind that consumables can have an
effect on your printer warranty. See “How Consumables Affect
Your Warranty” later in this appendix for details.
The industry standard for toner, developer, and OPC belt
measurement is quoted at 5% coverage (letter- or A4-size media).
Toner
Cartridges
Black
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
4,000 pages
3,000 pages
3,000 pages
3,000 pages
Developer
Cartridges
Black
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
30,000 pages
15,000 pages
15,000 pages
15,000 pages
Oil Bottle and The first oil bottle and cleaning pad change will last
Cleaning Pad
approximately 1,500 pages. After that, they will last
approximately 3,000 pages.
OPC Belt
Cartridge
50,000 planes
Waste Toner
Pack
6,000 planes per pack (sold in 5-pack sets for a total of
30,000 planes per set)
NOTE:
Measurement of waste-toner pack and OPC life is done
inplanes ratherthan pages. A plane is a pass ofthe OPC
beltfor onecolor. Forexample, a one-colorpagemakes
one pass (one plane) and a two-color page makes two
passes (two planes).
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
B - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Options
These are the options available for this printer at the time this
manual went to press. Contact your QMS vendor for a complete,
updated list, or (in the US) call QMS at (800) 777-7782.
250-sheet
Sheet Feeder
Comes with a media cassette, which is interchangeable
with the standard cassette.
30-envelope
Envelope
Cassette
Can be used in the standard media-cassette slot or the
optional sheet feeder.
Emulations
LN03 Plus
CCITT
Font Cards
HP ProCollection
System Administrator Security Card
Dataproducts Short-line Conversion Kit
External Hard Disk
Internal Hard Disk
Kanji Typeface Hard Disk Kit
Ethernet
Interface
LAN Manager/LAN Server
DECnet
TCP/IP
NetWare
EtherTalk
Token-Ring
Interface
LAN Manager/LAN Server
TCP/IP
NetWare
Optional
QMS Crown Document Option Commands
Documentation QMS Crown Network Notes
HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference
QMS Crown Technical Reference
B - 8
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
SIMMs
Memory
Upgrade Kit
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
Electrical
5V ± 10%
Fast page mode
tras = 80 ns.
trac = 80 ns.
tcas = 20 ns.
tcac = 20 ns.
Mechanical
Size
72-pin industry standard package; 1" high; tin-plated
contacts
4 MB (1M x 32)
8 MB (2M x 32)
16 MB (4M x 32)
32 MB (8M x 32)
You can get information on which SIMMs and hard disks are
compatible with your printer from Q-FAX. See appendix A, “QMS
Customer Support,” for information on using Q-FAX. Ask for
Q-FAX document 6502, “QMS-tested SIMMs and Hard Disks.”
Warranty Considerations
Youshould readyour printerwarranty carefully and be sureto store
it in a safe place. Various factors can affect a printer’s warranty.
Two important ones are consumables and electrostatic discharge.
How Consumables Affect Your Warranty
The use of non-QMS consumables and/or accessories alone
doesn’t affect either your warranty or any maintenance contract
you may have purchased. However, if a QMS printer failure or
damage is found to be directly attributable to the use of non-QMS
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
B - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
consumables and/or accessories, QMS will not repair the printer
free-of-charge. In this case, standard time and material charges will
be applied to service your printer for that particular failure or
damage. QMS recommends that you use only quality QMS
consumables and accessories to support your printer. To order
QMS accessories, in the US call (800) 777-7782. In all other
countries, check appendix A, “QMS Customer Support,” for the
QMS office closest to you.
How Electrostatic Discharge Affects Your Warranty
Incidental and consequential damages caused by not discharging
electrostatic buildup can affect your printer warranty. Electrostatic
discharge can destroy circuit boards, such as a SIMM or your
printer’s controller board. To prevent this, use an antistatic
wristband when handling printer circuit boards. To use it, attach
one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient
electrical ground (for example, the bare metal chassis of
equipment, as on the back of a computer, that is plugged in but
turned off). Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment
with an electrical current present. Turn off all power switches first.
Plastic, rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are
not acceptable grounding points. The printer isn’t an acceptable
grounding point either because it must be unplugged before you
perform this task.
If you don’t have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body’s
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the
tray assembly cover. Redischarge your body each time after
walking around and before touching the printer again.
B - 1 0
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Cable Pinouts
LocalTalk
The table below gives the correct pinouts for the printer end of the
8-pin LocalTalk cable used to connect a computer and printer:
Pinout:
Pin No. Name
LocalTalk
3
4
5
6
8
TxD-
GND
RxD-
TxD+
RxD+
Macintosh to Serial
The table below gives the correct pinouts for a cable connecting
the Macintosh printer or modem port to the printer serial port. (This
type of cable would be required to reinstall printer system software
from a Macintosh if printer software is not functioning.)
Pinout:
Host
Serial
Signal
Direction
Macintosh
to Serial
Pin No. Pin No.
1
5
4
3
7
2
-
RTS
CTS
TxD
GND
RxD
NC
From Mac
To Mac
From Mac
2
3
4,8*
5
To Mac
6
7
-
NC
*Pins 4 and 8 must be connected at DIN-8
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
B - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Serial
The table below gives the correct pinouts for the printer end of the
25-pin serial cable used to connect a computer and printer:
Pinout:
Serial
Pin No. Name
2
TxD
3
RxD
4
5
RTS (optional)
CTS
6
7
DSR (optional)
GND
20
DTR (optional)
IBM PC/XT, PC/AT, and Compatible Computers
Pinout:
Printer
IBM PC/XT
IBM PC/XT
DB-25S
DB-25P
1
1
2
3
3
2
4
5
5
4
20
6+8
7
6+8
20
7
Pinout:
Printer
IBM PC/AT
IBM PC/AT
DB-25S
DB-9P
1
1
2
2
3
3
7
5
20
6+8
B - 1 2
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Centronics Parallel
The following table describes the Centronics parallel interface
cable that can be used with your printer. (See “Notes to the
Centronics Parallel Cable Pinouts Table” on the next page for more
information.)
Pinout:
Signal
Return
Signal
Direction
Centronics
Parallel
Pin No. Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
-
STROBE-
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
DATA 8
ACKNLG-
BUSY+
PE+
SELECT
GND
VCC TEST
GND
IPRIME
FAULT-
GND
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
In
Out
Out
Out
Out
-
9
10
11
12
13
16
18
19-30
31
32
33
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
In
Out
-
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
B - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Notes to the Centronics Parallel Cable Pinouts Table
Direction refers to the direction of signal flow as viewed from the
printer.
Return denotes “twisted-pair return” and is to be connected at
signal-ground level. When wiring the interface, be sure to use a
twisted-pair cable for each signal and always complete connection
on the return side. To prevent noise effectively, these cables should
be shielded and connected to the chassis of the system unit and
printer, respectively.
All interface conditions are based on TTL level. Both the rise and
fall times of each signal must be less than 0.2 microseconds.
The cable must have an overall braided shield, Belden 8345 or
equivalent.
Connectors must have shielded housings. The overall shield must
be bonded to the shielded housings at both ends of the cable.
B - 1 4
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
1284 Parallel
The Centronics parallel interface supports two modes for 1284
bi-directional communication, nibble mode and byte mode:
In nibble mode, bi-directional communication between the printer
and the host is done in nibbles (four bits) with the low order nibble
sent first. A transfer of two nibbles is required for each byte of
information. In byte mode, bi-directional communication between
the printer and the host is done in bytes. The byte mode may be
used by the host device in a DMA (Direct Memory Access) mode
for more efficient operation.
When byte transfer is complete and there is no more data to
transmit, the host may do one of the following:
■ terminate and return to the compatibility mode.
■ stay in the HostBusy, Data Not Available phase.
■ set HostBusyLow,puttingthe interfaceinto the idlephase.
If there is additional data, the host may do one of the following:
■ set HostBusy Low, indicating that the host can accept
additional data.
■ stay in the HostBusy, Data Not Available phase.
■ terminate and return to the compatibility mode.
Check your host documentation to see if the host is 1284
compatible.
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
B - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Dataproducts Parallel
The following table describes the Dataproducts parallel interface
cable that can be used with your printer.
Pinout:
Signal
Return
Signal
Direction
Dataproducts
Parallel
Pin No. Pin No.
Description
Data Bit 3
Parity Error
(grounded)
1
2
-
In
11
12
-
+5V (limited by
1K ohm resistor) Out
19
20
21
22
23
28
30
34
36
38
39
41
43
45, 46
3
4
5
6
Data Bit 1
Data Bit 2
Online
Ready
Demand
Data Bit 8
In
In
Out
Out
Out
In
7
44
14
18
35
37
-
40
42
-
Paper Instruction In
Data Bit 5
Data Bit 7
Strobe
Logic Ground
Data Bit 4
Data Bit 6
Interface Verify
In
In
In
In
In
♦
B - 1 6
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
FCC Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.
To comply with part 15 of FCC rules, shielded interface cables must be used.
WARNING!
To prevent electrical shock, do not remove any covers from
your printer unless you are experienced in working with circuit boards and
are following instructions for procedures described in QMS documentation.
ACHTUNG!
Um einen Elektroschock zu vermeiden, sollte die Drucker-
abdeckung niemals von Unbefugten geöffnet werden. In jedem Fall müssen
die diesbezüglichen Hinweise des Handbuches genau beachtet werden!
CAUTION: Any modifications or changes to this product not expressly
approved in writing by the manufacturer responsible for compliance to Federal
Regulationscouldvoid theuser’sauthority to operatethisproductwithintheLaws
and Regulations of the Federal Communications Commission.
Canadian Users
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions
from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques (de la classe A) prescrites dans le
Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des
Communications du Canada.
N o t i c e s
C - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Vfg 1046/1984 Conformity Statement
Hierdurch bescheinigen wir, daß dieses Produkt in Übereinstimmung mit
Postordnung 1046/1984 ist und RFI unterdrückt ist. Die Geschäftslage und der
Verkauf diese Geräte auszuprobieren, mit der Übereinstimmung und der
Regierung zu bestätigen, wurde der Deutschen Bundespost gegeben.
Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daß Laser Printer model magicolor LX in
Übereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der Vfg 1046/1984 funkentstört ist.
Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerätes angezeigt
und die Berechtigung zur Überprüfung der Serie auf Einhaltung der
Bestimmungen eingeräumt.
QMS, Inc., Mobile, AL
Declaration of Manufacturer/Importer
We hereby certify that the laser printer model magicolor LX is in compliance with
Vfg 1046/1984 and is RFI suppressed.
The marketing and sale of this equipment was reported to the German Postal
Service.
The right to retest this equipment to verify compliance with the regulation was
given to the German Postal Service.
QMS, Inc., Mobile, AL
Electronics Emissions
Your printer complies with the Electronics Emissions Requirements of the
German Federal Minister for Postal and Telecommunication Technology
regulation:
Vfg. 1046/1984
Your printer complies with the Electronics Emissions Requirements of the
European Economic Council directive:
82/499/EEC
C - 2
N o t i c e s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Laser Safety
This printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according
to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the
printer does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective
housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine
during any phase of user operation.
Proprietary Statement
The digitally encoded software included with the QMS magicolor LX printer is
Copyrighted © 1995 by QMS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. This software may not
be reproduced, modified, displayed, transferred, or copied in any form or in any
manner or on any media, in whole or in part, without the express written
permission of QMS, Inc.
Copyright Notice
This manual is Copyrighted © 1995 by QMS, Inc., One Magnum Pass, Mobile,
AL 36618. All Rights Reserved. This manual may not be copied in whole or in
part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without the express written
permission of QMS, Inc.
Manual Notice
QMS, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to this manual and to the equipment
described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that
this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, QMS, Inc. makes
nowarranty of any kindincluding, but not limited to,anyimplied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this
manual. QMS, Inc. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors contained
in this manual or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of
the furnishing of this manual, or the use of this manual in operating the equipment,
or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.
N o t i c e s
C - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Colophon
This manual was written with WordPerfect, illustrated with Adobe Illustrator and
Micrografx Designer, and formatted with Ventura Publisher. The manual was
printed in camera-ready form on a QMS printer.
♦
C - 4
N o t i c e s
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Introduction
This appendix provides additional technical information on how
your printer works and memory management.
How Your Printer Works
Your laser printer works using a combination of a mechanical and
an electrical process. The whole process comes down to five stages
in which mechanical parts move media (paper or transparencies)
through the printer and progressively stronger electrical charges
transfer toner from area to area as it forms the image. See figure
D.1 for an overview of the mechanical part of the interior of your
printer.
Fig. D.1 Interior View of the Printer
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
1. A precharger unit puts an even charge across the OPC
(Organic Photoconductor) belt. Think of it as preparing a
surface for painting.
2. When you send an image file, the QMS controller uses that
information to control when the laser beam in the optical unit
turns on and off as it scans the OPC belt. When the beam is
on, it discharges sections of the belt forming an image.
3. Next, the belt passes under the developer/toner unit, which
opens, and toner is electrically attracted to the discharged
areas. (In color printing, each color is individually applied
during a separate pass of the belt: yellow first, followed by
magenta, cyan, and black.)
4. The belt carries the toner image to the transfer drum, where a
slightly stronger charge attracts and stores the toner until all
colors are processed. Once the full image is collected, the
drum turns toward the transfer roller, which has an even
stronger attracting charge. However, just before the toner can
switch to the transfer roller, media passes between the drum
and roller, so the toner lands on the media instead.
5. Rollers pull the media up through the fuser unit, where heat
and pressure set the toner, and the final copy comes out into
the top cover.
D - 2
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Memory
The memory requirements of the printer are dictated by the
applications that you run. Of the printer’s memory, 9 MB are
divided among blocks or “memory clients,” each dedicated to a
specific purpose. Added or extra printer memory (if any) can be
redistributed among the memory clients where it can best serve
your specific printing needs. This appendix explains the different
memory clients and what happens if you increase or decrease their
memory allocations. See the glossary for definitions of unfamiliar
memory terms.
Don’t feel compelled to reconfigure your printer’s memory just
because you have the ability to: printer memory is configured at
the factory to provide optimal performance in most printing
environments. Remember that the engine’s maximum speed is
about 8 pages per minute for a letter- or A4-size, monochrome
page, no matter how much memory is installed.
NOTE: To reset all factory defaults in the Configuration menu,
use the restore defaults option in the
Administration/Miscellaneous menu. You can also reset
all factory defaults by simultaneously holding down the
Select and Online/Offline keys (for about 10 seconds)
while turning the printer off and on again. The reset
process takes several minutes to complete.
Memory Management
There is no single correct way for everyone to allocate printer
memory. The factory default configuration might be the best for
your environment. Or, for example, if you use a large number of
PostScript fonts of various point sizes, you might want to increase
the amount of memory allocated to the memory client dedicated to
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
PostScript fonts. Each of your printer’s features requires a
minimum amount of memory. If you use a feature, you must
allocate enough memory to the client that controls it, but if there
are features you do not use, you can move excess memory from
unused features to other clients that need additional memory.
To determine if and how you need to reallocate printer memory,
read the descriptions of the different memory clients in the sections
that follow.
The Memory Clients
Thememoryclients canbesetupfromtheAdministration/Memory
menu of the printer’s Configuration menu. Each time you make
changes in the Memory menu, print a status page (in the
Administration/Special Pages menu) to confirm the memory
reallocation. When you allocate memory to a specific client
through the control panel, it is allocated in kilobytes (KB). The
sizes listed on the status page are in bytes, so you must divide the
numbers on the status page by 1024 to get the equivalent number
of kilobytes entered through the control panel.
NOTE: The value for each memory client must be evenly
divisible by 4 KB: if a value is entered that is not evenly
divisibleby4 KB, itis automatically convertedtothenext
lower value that is divisible by 4 KB. For example, if you
enter 102 KB, the actual value is lowered to 100 KB
(assuming there is enough memory available to allocate
to this client). The amount shown on the status page will
then be 102,400 (100 x 1024).
D - 4
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Frame Buffer
Listed as K Mem Framebuff in the Administration/Memory menu,
the frame buffer memory client holds rasterized (bitmapped)
images of page faces that are ready to be sent to the physical print
engine. Your QMS printer comes configured with enough frame
buffer memory for a single four-color 300 dpi legal-size page or a
single four-color 600 dpi letter-size page in the largest media size
supported.
PostScript Heap
Listed as K Mem for PSHeap in the Administration/Memory menu
and elsewhere as PostScript VM and Virtual Memory, this client
holds downloaded fonts, PostScript operators, and forms.
Inefficiently coded PostScript jobs can consume an infinite amount
of virtual memory or leave objects in the PostScript heap after the
print jobs are completed, leading to virtual memory errors. If not
enough memory is allocated to the PostScript heap, the job cannot
print.
Increasingthememoryallocatedto this client allowsmorecomplex
jobs to print and increases the number of fonts that can be
downloaded to virtual memory. If you receive a virtual memory
error when attempting to print a job or download a font, this client
should be increased in small increments until the error message
goes away.
Spool Buffers
Listed as K Mem for Spool in the Administration/Memory menu
and as Host Input on the status page, this memory client stores
incoming data from all the interfaces until the physical print engine
can print the job. When enough memory is allocated to this client,
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
the host becomes free more quickly, and the number of jobs that
the printer can accept simultaneously is increased. So increasing
this client can be beneficial in reducing network traffic, but
throughput speed is not necessarily increased. If available, a hard
drive can supplement this client with additional memory needed
for spooling. See “Hard Disk Management,” later in this appendix.
PostScript Font Cache
Listed as K Mem PS Fonts in the Administration/Memory menu
and also as Font Cache, this memory client stores bitmapped
representations of previously rasterized PostScript fonts, which
reduces the number of times a font must be converted from outline
form to bitmap form, so that pages print faster.
As the font cache memory fills, the printer erases bitmapped
characters to make room for new characters. By increasing the
memory allocated to this client, the printer can store more
characters and spend less time erasing and replacing characters in
the cache.
Normally, you do not need to change this memory clientunless you
use a large number of fonts at different point sizes. There is no
specific formula to use in figuring the amount of memory required
by the font cache, but after a certain point, large font caches cause
printing to take longer than smaller font caches because of the
search time through the cache. The recommended font cache size
is 128-256 KB, but you should experiment to see what font cache
size works best for you.
Emulation
Listed as K Mem Emulation in the Administration/Memory menu,
this memory is used to store any optional (loadable) emulations.
D - 6
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Increasing this client’s memory allows more complicated
non-PostScript jobs to print and allows larger, optional emulations
or multiple emulations to be loaded and ready to process jobs,
without having to be reloaded every time a job in that emulation is
sent.
If an emulation is loaded to process a print job and there is not
enough memory in the emulation client, another emulation already
loaded might be unloaded automatically to obtain the necessary
memory. If you notice a delay in printing between jobs that have
different non-resident emulations, it’s possible that emulations are
being reloaded each time they are run. Adding to the emulation
client might eliminate this unloading and reloading and,
consequently, increase throughput.
Also, increase the emulation client if you are printing complex
non-PostScript jobs that might require more memory to process
correctly.
Temporary Emulation
Listed as K Mem Emul Tmp in the Administration/Memory menu
and as Emulation Temporary elsewhere, this memory is used by
non-PostScript emulations for storing downloaded fonts, forms,
and macros. This allows “context switching,” which is the ability
to retaindownloaded fonts and forms even after the printer changes
from one emulation to another. Context switching prevents
repetitive downloading and traffic congestion on networks.
Normally, this memory client does not need to be changed unless
you plan to download many different non-PostScript fonts.
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Display List
Listed as K Mem Display in the Administration/Memory menu,
this client shares its memory with the PostScript heap. The display
list stores compressed representations, or blocks, of the pages to be
printed. Approximately 1 compressed block is required for a
normal 8.5" x 11" text page, 4 compressed blocks for an 8.5" x 11"
page that includes some graphics, and as many as 500 compressed
blocks for an extremely complex page. Approximately 64 KB of
memory for each compressed block is required by the printer.
Many pages of compressed blocks belonging to multiple print jobs
can be stored simultaneously in the display list. If enough memory
is allocated to this memory client, a page can always be ready to
print as soon as another page has been imaged by the print engine,
so increasing the amount of memory in this client might improve
printing throughput. If not enough memory is allocated to this
client, memory is taken from the excess memory client (PostScript
heap) to complete the print job.
Disk Cache
Listedas KMemDiskCacheinthe Administration/Memory menu,
this memory client stores frequently used data in system memory
instead of continually storing and retrieving it from a hard disk. If
a hard disk is used and a lot of disk access is required, adding
memory to thedisk cachemight increasethe printer’sperformance.
For example, if many fonts are stored on disk, increasing the disk
cache size can help the printer access these fonts faster.
The amount of memory needed for the disk cache client depends
on the size of the disk, the number of disks, the number of
subdirectories on each disk, and the amount of memory dedicated
to caching. The disk cache size should be set to 0 KB if no hard
disks are connected to the printer, or if the hard disks are connected
D - 8
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
but are not being used. However, the hard disks remain unavailable
until this client’s size is increased.
The recommended amount of memory for the disk cache client is
as follows:
■ 120 KB minimum
■ 0.5 KB per MB of disk storage total for all disks
MB Printer Mem
This memory client shows the number of megabytes of RAM
available to be split among the memoryclients whendisk swapping
is turned off.
System Memory
Listed as System Use on the status page, this non-configurable
client is the amount of RAM that is used to run the printer’s
operating system. It is never increased or decreased. The system
memory subtracted from the total amount of RAM identifies the
amount of RAM available for all the other memory clients.
Hard Disk Management
In addition to your printer’s internal hard disk, you can connect up
to six external hard disks to your printer via the SCSI port. These
hard disks serve as secondary storage places for such items as
downloaded fonts, emulations, and spooled data. Once you have a
hard disk installed on your printer, it has virtual memory
capabilities for spooling overflow, which is an extension of the
spool memory client.
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Spooling Overflow
The spool overflow option (Administration/Disk Operations
menu) specifies the maximum space reserved for spooling
overflow on the hard disk, if one is available.
When aprint jobis sent to your printer, aportion of thatjob is stored
in the spooling buffer (Administration/Memory/K Mem for Spool
menu) while the rest of the job is being printed. If all the memory
in the spooling buffer is being used and the spool overflow option
is enabled, the printer stores the overflow from the spooling buffer
in a reserved area of the hard disk. Even if you have a hard disk,
you should allocate as much RAM to the spool buffer as possible
for increased throughput.
Reserving a 10-20 MB portion of the hard disk for spooling
overflow works well for most printing environments. If too much
ofthediskis dedicatedto spooling, theprinter’sperformancemight
actually be hindered because the printer tries to fill the overflow
space before passing the job to the processor.
PS Protocol
Your printer supports a new protocol for communication between
the printer and a host computer over a serial, parallel, or optional
interface connection. This new protocol is called PS protocol. This
binary communications protocol allows any 8-bit binary value
(0-255) to be treated as data, while allowing a few of the values to
function as special control characters. When communicating 8-bit
binary data in binary or binary fixed mode, the printer uses the
quoting mechanism of the binary communications protocol (BCP)
to distinguish between the special control characters and print job
binary data.
D - 1 0
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
To differentiate data from the special control characters, any data
that is the same as one of the following special control characters
must be quoted.
ASCII
Keyboard Name
ASCII
ASCII
Hex
Control
Function
^A
^C
^D
^E
^Q
^S
^T
^\
SOH
ETX
EOT
ENQ
DC1
DC3
DC4
FS
0x01
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x11
0x13
0x14
0x1C
Quote data character
Abort job and flush to end of file
End-of-file marker
(Reserved for future use)
XON in XON/XOFF flow control
XOFF in XON/XOFF flow control
Job status request
(Reserved for future use)
A data byte is quoted by replacing it with a two-character sequence.
The first character is a ^A (ASCII hex 0x01), and the second
character is the character itself XORed with the ASCII value 0x40.
For example, to send the value 0x14(^T) as data, send the
two-character sequence 0x01 0x54 (^a T) instead. (ASCII “T” is
the result of XORing ^T with 0x40).
This method of quoting guarantees that whenever the printer
receives any of the eight control characters, the control function is
intendedregardlessofwhetherthe preceding character is a ^A. Any
data byte not equal to one of the eight special control characters is
transmitted by sending the data byte. For more information on BCP
and quoting, see the PostScript Language Reference Manual
(Adobe Systems, Inc., Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1990,
ISBN 0-201-18127-4), the “Adobe Serial and Parallel
Communications Protocols Specification” (in Adobe Developer
Support. Adobe Systems, Inc., February 14, 1992), and the
“PostScript Language Reference Manual” (in Supplement for
Version 2011, Adobe Systems, Inc., January 24, 1992).
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
PS Protocol Menu for Optional Network Interfaces
These options for the PS Protocol menus for optional network
interface cards set the binary communications protocol (BCP) for
communicating over that interface to a PostScript printer. The
default option is normal. Any change to this menu takes effect
immediately.
PS Protocol Menu
Normal
Normal Fixed
QBinary
QBinary Fixed
Binary
Binary Fixed
Normal
Enables standard, ASCII hex protocol. Data is sent and
received in ASCII format. This mode is recommended
if you do not print binary data. It was designed for data
in the printable ASCII range. Print jobs can alter the PS
protocol value through PostScript operators.
Normal
Fixed
Enables standard, ASCII hex protocol. Print jobs can
not alter this value through PostScript operators.
QBinary
Quoted Binary. Enables binary communications
protocol. Print jobs can alter this value through
PostScript operators. Data in the printableASCII range
also prints. Use the special quoting mechanism for the
special characters and ^D (EOF).
QBinary
Fixed
Quoted Binary Fixed. Enables binary communications
protocol. Print jobs can not alter this value through
PostScript operators. Data in the printableASCII range
also prints. Use the special quoting mechanism for the
special characters and ^D (EOF).
Binary
Enables binary communications protocol. Print jobs
can alter this value through PostScript operators. Data
in the printable ASCII range also prints.
D - 1 2
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Binary
Fixed
Enables binary communications protocol. Print jobs
can not alter this value through PostScript operators.
Data in the printable ASCII range also prints.
A data stream sent through the serial or parallel interface
using Binary would be treated the same as a data stream
sent through the optional network interface using Quoted
Binary on your QMS Crown printer. However, a data
stream sent through the optional network interface using
Quoted Binary would not be treated the same as a data
stream sent through the same interface using Binary.
Advantages
The main advantage of using the Binary and Fixed Binary PS
protocol modes when sending binary data is that these modes
compress the data stream allowing your documents to be smaller
so you can send smaller jobs to the printer. For example, some
device drivers can format bit map images as binary data instead of
as ASCII hex data.
Implementation
To implement PS protocol for sending binary data on your system
you need a device driver available with some applications or
operating systems, or you can alternatively use a program to read
the data and write out the quoted characters. See your QMS vendor
for any available information on device drivers or binary filter
programs.
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Updated DOCs
This section provides updated information on HP PCL 4 and PCL
5 DOCs. This information will be merged into the appropriate
manuals as they are revised. But until then, it supersedes the
following: QMS Crown Document Option Commands manual
(part number 1800216-001E) and HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical
Reference Manual (part number 1800304-001A).
PCL 5 Emulation Terminology
Font
A font is a unique set of objects that has an ID and attributes
(symbol set, spacing, pitch, height, style, weight, and typeface
number). A font is accessedby specifyingadesiredsetofattributes.
The system selects the font that most closely matches these
attributes from the available set of fonts. See the PCL 5 Emulation
Technical ReferenceManual for informationonwhatcharacterizes
a PCL font.
There are two types of fonts: bound and unbound. A bound font
supports a single symbol set. An unbound font supports multiple,
but not all, symbol sets. With unbound fonts, the symbol sets are
organized into two groups: normal and Dingbats. All downloaded
fonts are bound,and all residentfonts (exceptZapf-Dingbatswhich
supports the Dingbats symbol set) support the group of normal
symbol sets.
In the QMS PCL 5 emulation, only fonts located in the current
resource may be accessed by a PCL font ID using the normal
<ESC>(#X sequence. All other fonts (resident, cartridge, or other),
D - 1 4
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
including those stored on the additional resources, can be accessed
only by attributes.
Also, only objects stored in the current resource may be deleted
directly by the PCL language. Therefore, unless they are explicitly
removed, external fonts are always available to all PCL jobs.
Font Index Number
In addition to its ID, a downloaded font also has an unique index
number that is automatically assigned by the printer when the font
is downloaded. This index number may change if new resources
are added, but in practice it usually remains fixed. All currently
available PCL fonts (resident, cartridge, temporary, permanent,
and external) are listed with their font index numbers on the
Advanced Status Page.
The font index number defines the default PCL font to be used if
"selectbyid" is specified as the default PCL font. Do not confuse
the font index with the PCL font ID, a mechanism used to identify
downloaded fonts in the PCL language using the <ESC>(#X
sequence. There is no way to specify fonts by their font index
numbers from within the PCL language. Only the default PCL font
is affected.
Object
There are three types of PCL downloaded objects: temporary,
permanent, and external. Temporary objects reside on the current
resource and they are deleted either at the beginning and end of a
job (unless Retain Temporary is set to On or On Compatibility) or
when the system is reset (<ESC>E or receipt of Printer Job
Language). Permanent objects reside on the current resource and
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
are retained when the system is reset (E or receipt of Printer Job
Language). External objects reside on the additional resources.
All objects are temporary when first created. They can be made
permanent objects through PCL commands. Both temporary or
permanent objects can become external objects when the current
resource is changed (for temporary objects Retain Temporary must
be set to On, True, or On Compatibility). External objects become
permanent when the resource in which they reside becomes the
current resource.
User-downloaded PCL objects (with the exception of palettes) are
identified by an ID when they are downloaded. The ID is usually
set by the file performing the download. If not, the system will
provide a default value (normally 0, but this can be set using the
%%IncludeFeature:install DOC). If two objects of the same type
are provided with the same ID, the last one received replaces the
former. From that point on, downloaded objects are accessible by
their IDs.
Resource
A resource is a location where downloaded objects such as fonts,
macros, and patterns are stored. The printer has one default
resource and one additional resource for each attached hard disk.
All downloaded objects are stored in file systems which reside on
these resources. The RAM1 resource may be used as the default,
but systems with at least one hard disk use the system disk instead.
So, for any hard disk-equipped printer, all downloaded objects
(except palettes, which require specialhandling) are stored on disk.
The default resource and one of the additional resources can reside
on the same hard disk, but they will be located in different
directories of that resource’s file system.
D - 1 6
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Updated PCL 5 DOCs
%%IncludeFeature:scalablefonts(value)
Purpose:
Enables/disables PCL 5 scalable fonts (to print PCL 4
documents that have selected PCL 5 scalable fonts or
to more closely emulate the PCL 4 font environment).
value:
0 (enables scalable fonts) or 1 (disables scalable fonts)
0
Default:
%%IncludeFeature:install(resource id object id)
Purpose:
Establishes the current resource and the default object
ID value for the current job to which it is attached. If it
is attached to a job that downloads a font without
setting the current object ID using the PCL escape
sequence <ESC>(#X, it has the appearance of
“storing” the font on disk. If no
%%IncludeFeature:install DOC command is sent, the
internal default location is used; otherwise, this
parameter, which must be provided, specifies one of
the alternate locations. For most QMS printers,
resource 6 is the internal system disk.
resource id:
object id:
0 to 6 (identifies one of the possible locations for
downloaded objects). Default: internal system disk
0-32767 (assigns an ID to an object, such as a font,
macro, or pattern). Default: 0. The object ID can be
used instead of the usual PCL command to assign an
ID. This ID is overwritten by any ID assigned from the
PCL print job, if present. If neither a DOC command
nor the PCL print job specify an ID, the default ID of
0 is used. Identifiers must be unique. If the ID matches
an ID for an existing object, that object is deleted and
replaced by the new object. If
a
%%IncludeFeature:remove command precedes a
%%IncludeFeature:install command, the install
command is ignored (these two commands are
mutually exclusive). All downloaded objects are by
default temporary and will be deleted at the end of a
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
job unless Retain Temporary is set to On or On
Compatibility. If the file the %%IncludeFeature:install
command is attached to does not make its downloaded
fonts permanent or Retain Temporary is not set, then
those objects are removed from the disk when the job
completes. A downloaded font can be accessed only by
its ID if the font is stored in the current resource.
Regardless of its resource, a font can be selected by its
attributes. Example A shows a pair of jobs that will not
produce the desired results (subjob 2 has only the
appearance of storing the font on disk). By contrast,
examples B and C show a pair of jobs that will produce
the desired results.
Example A: Job 1
%!
%%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6
20)
%%EndComments
<ESC>)s#W<download font header>*c33E
(s#W<char 33 data>*c34E
(s#W<char 34 data>... *c5F
Example A: Job 2
<ESC>(20Xthis text is NOT in the downloaded
font...
Example B: Job 1
%!
%%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6
20)
%%EndComments
<ESC>)s#W<download font header>*c33E
D - 1 8
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
(s#W<char33data>*c34E
(s#W<char34data>.*c5F
Example B: Job 2
<ESC>(8U(s1p12v0s0b4153This text will be in
the downloaded font, if it supports the
ROMAN-8 symbol set, is proportionally
spaced, 12 points in height (or scalable),
upright, medium weight, and has type # 4153.
Example C: Job 1
%!
%%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6
20 )
%%EndComments
<ESC>)s#W<download font header>*c33E
(s#W<char 33 data>*c34E
(s#W<char 34 data>... *c5F
Example C: Job 2
%!
%%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6)
%%EndComments
<ESC>(20Xthis text is also in the downloaded
font...)
%%IncludeFeature:remove(resource id object id object type)
Purpose:
Removes an external object from the printer system.
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
object type:
*, font, macro, pattern, or other object type (specifies
the kind of objects that are to be deleted from the
specified printer system). If object type is * or is not
specified, then all objects on the specified resource
with the specified object id are removed.
object id:
*, -1 (wildcard) to 32767 (specifies the ID of the object
that is to be removed from the printer system). Default
-1. If the object id is not specified, or if it is specified
as * or -1, all objects on the specified resource are
removed. Unlike the %%IncludeFeature:install
command, the %%IncludeFeature:remove command
does not set any defaults, and it is not directly related
to the job to which it is attached. This command allows
youto removeexternalobjects fromthesystemwithout
having to generate a job containing both the DOC
command to set the appropriate current resource and
the PCL code to delete the desired object. If this
command is specified more than once, the last
command received is the one that will be executed. In
the following example, the remove(6 5 font) command
is executed, and the remove(6 1 macro) command is
ignored:
%%IncludeFeature:remove(6 1 macro) remove(6
5 font)
%%IncludeFeature:resource(resource id object code)
Purpose:
Establishes the current resource and the default object
code value for the current job to which it is attached.
This
command
is
identical
to
the
%%IncludeFeature:install DOC. It is included for
backward compatibility. All downloaded objects are
by default temporary, and will be deleted at the end of
a job unless Retain Temporary is set to on, true, or on
compatibility. If the file that the %%IncludeFeature:
resource command is attached to does not make the
downloaded font permanent and Retain Temporary is
not set, then those objects are removed from the disk
when the job completes. A downloaded font can only
be accessed by its ID if the font is stored in the current
D - 2 0
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
resource. Regardless of its resource, a font can be
selected by its attributes.
resource id:
object code:
0 to 6 (identifies one of the possible locations for
downloaded objects). Default: internal system disk. If
no resource item is provided, the internal default
location is used; otherwise, this parameter, which must
be provided, specifies one of the alternate locations.
For most QMS printers, resource 6 is the internal
system disk.
0-32767 (assigns a code to an object such as a font,
macro, or pattern).
%%IncludeFeature:font (font name)
Purpose:
Specifies the default font to use. Fonts are identified by
the names shown above. Only the resident fonts may
be selected (the available set varies from printer to
printer). An asterisk * in the name indicates that a font
is scalable, and that a point size needs to be applied
using the pointsize command. The value selectbyid
indicates that the default font ID or unique font index
(set by the fontid command) will be used for default
font selection. Selectinga bound, bitmapfontoverrides
the default settings for symbol set and point size. An
unbound font uses the specified default symbol set if
possible, whilea scalable font usesthe default font size.
font name:
courier12times*blditalic
courier12bolduniv*
courier12italicuniv*italic
courier10univ*bold
courier10bolduniv*blditalic
courier10italicunivcond*
lineprinter
univcond*italic
times*univcond*bold
times*italicunivcond*blditlc
times*bold
selectbyindex
%%IncludeFeature:fontid (index #)
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
Purpose:
Specifies the default font index number. This index is
used when the Default Font selected is selectbyid. This
allows for selection of fonts only on the current
resource. Selection of default font by index overrides
the symbol set value. The symbol set is overridden if a
bound font is selected as the default or if an unbound
font is selected that does not supportthe defaultsymbol
set. Ifa fontwiththespecifiedindex exists,itisselected
asthe Default Font. Ifthespecifiedvalue doesnotexist,
courier 12 point is substituted.
index #:
0 to 32767
%%IncludeFeature:symbolset (name)
Purpose: Specifies the default symbol set for the emulation. This
command specifies the default symbol set. Not all
symbol sets are available with certain resident fonts. In
particular, the Desktop, PS Math, Math 8, Microsoft
Pub, Pi Font, PS Text, Ventura Intl, Ventura Math,
Ventura US, and Windows symbol sets cannot be used
with the resident bitmap fonts: courier10,
courier10bold, courier10italic, courier12,
courier12bold, courier12italic, and lineprinter. The
five dingbat symbol sets (PS-Zapf-Dingbats,
Ventura-Dingbats,
Zapf-Dingbats100,
Zapf-Dingbats200, and Zapf-Dingbats300) can be
used with all fonts. If a mismatch between symbol set
and font occurs, the standard PCL font selection
mechanism is used to locate a font that matches the
selected symbol set. With the standard set of fonts
distributed by QMS, this matches the Times* font, but
other user installed fonts could change this result.
name:
roman-8iso-60, pc-850iso-61, pc8-usiso-69,
pc8-dniso-84, ecma-94iso-85, legaldesktop, hpgerman
ps-math, hpspanishmath8, iso-2microsoft-pub,
iso-4pi-font, iso-6ps-text, iso-10ventura-intl,
iso-11ventura-math,
iso-15windows,
iso-14ventura-us,
iso-16ps-zapf-dingbats,
iso-17ventura-dingbats, iso-21zapf-dingbats100,
iso-25zapf-dingbats200, iso-57zapf-dingbats300
D - 2 2
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
%%IncludeFeature:criscrlf(value)
Purpose:
Controls the default line termination mode (the
<ESC>&k#G command). Specifies the line
termination treatment of a carriage return.
value:
off (treat line feed as a line feed) or on (treat line feed
as a carriage return-line feed combination).
The result of various settings for these parameters is
shown in table below, in terms of the equivalent code
passed to the PCL line termination command
(<ESC>&k#G). The second setting (lfiscrlf on, criscrlf
off) is correct for most ASCII listings printed from
UNIX machines. PC listings should usually be done
with both items set to off, and Macintosh listings
usually requirethethirdsetting(lfiscrlfoff, criscrlf on).
The following table shows the criscrlf/lfiscrlf
commands and the corresponding PCL Line
Termination command parameters.
LFISCRLF CRISCRLF PCL Code
Comments
Off
On
Off
Off
0
2
CR is CR, LF is LF, FF is FF
CR is CR, LF is CR-LF, FF is
CR-FF
Off
On
On
On
1
3
CR is CR-LF, LF is LF, FF is
FF
CR is CR-LF, LF is CR-LF, FF
is CR-FF
%%IncludeFeature:lfiscrlf (value)
Purpose:
Controls the default line termination mode (the
<ESC>&k#G command); specifies the line
termination treatment of a linefeed.
value:
off (treats linefeed as a linefeed) or on (treats linefeed
as carriage return-linefeed combination).
The result of various settings for these parameters is
shown in the table included in the Set Carriage Return
(Line Termination) discussion, in terms of the
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
D - 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
equivalent code passed to the PCL line termination
command. The second setting (lfiscrlf on, criscrlf off)
is correct for most ASCII listings printed from UNIX
machines. PC listings should usually be done with both
items set to Off, and Macintosh listings usually require
the third setting (lfiscrlf Off, criscrlf On). Note that the
FF becomes a CR-FF when the LF is a CRLF.
%%IncludeFeature:linesperinch (#)
Purpose:
Sets the default PCL line spacing. The
%%IncludeFeature:linesperinch DOC affects PCL’s
default VMI (vertical motion index).
#:
1-48. Default: 6.
%%IncludeFeature:pointsize(default font size)
Purpose:
Specifies the point size for scalable default font. If the
selected font is not scalable or if a bitmap font size is
specified, this setting is ignored.
default font:
0.25 to 999.75 in 0.25 increments.
♦
D - 2 4
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
For more information about a term, check the index listings.
Application A computer program designed to help people perform a certain
type of work, for example, a word processing program, a page layout
program, a programming language, or software that handles graphics and
prints documents, spreadsheets, and/or forms.
Consumables Supplies that are used up, like print media, toner, and
developer.
Crown A proprietary multitasking printer operating system, which allows
QMS to adapt an advanced softwarecode base to the evolving printing needs
of users in many different operating environments. As implemented in the
QMS Crownfamily of products, this modular, portablearchitectureprovides
advanced features as well as the capability to easily integrate new features
as they become available. A QMS Crown printer can process and print jobs
simultaneously instead of sequentially (multi-task) because of advanced
memory management techniques such as simultaneous interfacing, input
buffering, job spooling, emulation sensing processing, compile-ahead
technology, and compressed data formats.
Default The values or settings built-in to a system or program. The default
settings in this printer can be changed. See also factory default.
Emulation Theability of theprinter to respond tocommands thatareintended
for a different type of printer. For example, when the printer is set for
PostScript Level 2 emulation, it responds to the same commands that a
PostScript Level 2 printer does.
Engine The non-intelligent part of a printer where the paper is physically
processed and printed.
ESP Technology Emulation Sensing Processor Technology: technology
that uses a form of artificial intelligence to analyze incoming file data from
any of the printer’s interfaces. ESP technology, which works with most
popular commercially available applications, selects the appropriate printer
G l o s s a r y
G - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
emulation from those installed on the printer and processes the print job,
freeing the user from having to change printer switch settings or send
software commands toaccommodate different printeremulations.ESPmode
is an option for the printer’s LocalTalk, serial, and parallel interfaces.
Factory Default The printer settings that are programmed into the printer at
the factory. These settings can be changed through the printer control panel
oroverridden withprintercommands sentthroughsoftware. Seealso default.
Imageable Region The areas of a page sizea printercan access, determined
by hardware limits (physical page size and margins required by the printer
engine) and software constraints (amount of memory available for the
full-page frame buffer). Also referred to as imageable area and printable
region.
Interface The place where a physical connection is made between
components, such as a cable and printer, and communication or signals are
passed back and forth.
Laser Paper Paper designed for laser printing. Laser paper allows the richest
color and black and white output and the most consistent coverage
(especially for large areas of one color). It is best for prepress proofs. For
laser paper printing, we recommend Hammermill Laser Print. Laser paper
has a printable side and a non-printable side; usually, the printable side is
indicated by an arrow on the side of the wrapping covering the media, and
that side is slightly smoother. See also plain paper.
Manual Feed Feeding single sheets of print media to the printer by hand (as
opposed to letting the printer automatically pull sheets from a cassette).
Media See print media.
Mode One of several alternative conditions or methods of operation.
Network Administrator See system administrator.
Option In this manual, either a choice available in the printer’s Configuration
submenu, or an extra accessory you can purchase for your printer.
G - 2
G l o s s a r y
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PDL Page Description Language: a programming language, such as PostScript
or HP-GL, that translates messages from a computer to a printer. See also
PostScript.
Planes Toner, developer and OPC belt measurements (rather than copies) for
usage. A plane is a pass of the OPC belt for one color, so a one-color page
makes onepass (oneplane), a two-color pagemakes two passes(twoplanes),
and so forth.
Plain Paper Uncoated, general-purpose paper designed for photocopy
printing, found in most offices. It is less expensive than laser paper, but does
not offer the same output quality that laser paper does. This printer has plain
paper capability: it produces good output on documents such as reports and
newsletters. See also laser paper.
PostScript A page description language trademarked by Adobe Systems Inc.
PostScript Level 2 capabilities, among others, are implemented in the printer
through a PostScript emulation developed by QMS. PostScript Level 2
emulation is thenative languageof yourprinter’scontroller. It describes text,
graphics, and page images to the printer.
Print Media The material on which the printer prints (for example, paper,
transparencies, and labels).
Printer Driver A file that enables the application to talk to the printer,
translating computer data into a form understood by the printer. Usually, the
printer driver is in the application.
Protocol A set of procedures that control how data is transmitted between
devices.
QCOLOR A QMS-developed technology for automatically optimizing color
printing from Windows and Macintosh applications. QCOLOR configures
the magicolor LX for the best output quality based on the contents of the
document (for example, text, line art, presentation graphics, photographs, or
scans).
Resident Permanent printer features.
G l o s s a r y
G - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SIO Simultaneous Interface Operation: a Crown function that allows printing
to all three of the printer’s concurrently active ports. See also Crown.
Software Loadable System (SLS) Your printer offers a software
loadable system, SLS, which allows you to add features and enhancements
as they become available from QMS. This feature works through the parallel
port via the control panel or PS Executive Series Utilities, and it makes it
easier for you to keep up with the latest software changes.
Start-Up Page A page generated automatically when you turn on theprinter,
if it has not been disabled through the control panel, an application (such as
PS Executive Series Utilities), a PostScriptoperator, or a DOCfunction. This
page gives limited information on the printer, such as the printer’s name, the
number of pages printed to date, current interface settings, and the amount
of RAM available.
Status Page A page or multiple pages listing detailed printer status, such as
identification information and settings, current memory configuration,
timeout values, communication and buffer settings, and available fonts. The
printer has two status page options, standard and the advanced. The standard
page is more detailed than a start-up page, but far less so than the advanced
option. (See “The Status Pages” in chapter 5 for details.)
System Administrator The person in charge of operating a network; also
called a network administrator.
Trailer Page A separator page that prints after the last page of a print job to
identify a print job and help users sort out jobs. For details on this page and
what it monitors, see “Header and Trailer Pages” in chapter 5. Also, the
information on trailer pages for this printer can be customized with QMS
Document Option Commands. (The QMS Crown Document Option
Commands manual, which came with your printer, contains more
information.)
Utility Software, such as PS Executive Series Utilities, that performs a specific
function of system management, such as maintaining disks and files or
controlling a printer.
♦
G - 4
G l o s s a r y
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
100K CHECKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
1284 parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
600 dpi
Printing Jobs in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
RAM requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Selecting through the control panel. . . 4-48
Startup Options submenu. . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Adobe
Illustrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7, C-4
Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Agfa FotoFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Aldus
FreeHand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8
PageMaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
PageMaker (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
PrePrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Alignment
A
A media
See also Glossary
A4
See also Glossary
See also Image alignment
Image not centered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Print engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Angles
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Accessories
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Dataproducts conversion. . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Dataproducts conversion kit . . . . . . . . . B-8
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Emulation cards. . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-47 - 8-48
Font cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-47 - 8-48
Network interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Warranty considerations . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
ADJUST xxxxx BIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Adjusters
See also Halftones
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Anti-static wristband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Apple ColorSync. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
AppleShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
See also LocalTalk
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Spool buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Applications
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 9-25
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
ASCII files, won’t print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
AUTOEXEC.BAT . . . . . . . 3-17, 3-20, 9-27
Automatic color control
See QCOLOR
Automatic error recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Avant Garde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
See Paper guides
Administration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Communications submenu . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Disk Operations submenu . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Emulations submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Engine submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Memory submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42, D-4
Miscellaneous submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Saving changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Special Pages submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
B
BACK PANEL OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Banding
Reducing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29, 7-9
Banner page
Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
I n d e x
I - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Baud rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 4-23
Bulletin board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
BELT CARTRIDGE MISINSTALLED . 9-1
Bi-directional parallel interface . . . . . . . B-15
Bitmapped PCL fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Black and white printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Blank pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Bookman. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Buffers
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 - 8-14
Cassette
Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Lower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-1
Media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Cautions
External hard disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
In manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
CCITT
Enlarging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
See also Memory
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Printing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Technical reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Center image
See Alignment
See Image alignment
Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Bulletin board, QMS. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, A-1
Application notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, A-2
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Technical information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Business CRD . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29, 7-10 - 7-11
Centronics parallel
cable pinouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Chain Inputbin menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Change Printer Name
Error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Changes, default
C
Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Preventing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Changing media sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Charger unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Grid plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
CHECK WASTE TONER . . . . . . . 6-14, 9-1
CIE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Cleaning
Charger unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Cleaning solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Manual-feed belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Paper exit plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37, 6-41
Paper exit rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Paper-feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Pre-charger unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Register roller unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Cleaning pad
Cable pinouts
Centronics parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
IBM PC/AT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
IBM PC/XT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
LocalTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Macintosh to serial port. . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Parallel, Dataproducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Cables
Macintosh interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
PC interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
RJ11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Calibration, color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Calibration, engine
See Alignment
See Registration
CALL FOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Canada, radio noise emissions . . . . . . . . . C-1
Cancel key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 5-17
Cancelling a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 5-17
CANCELLING JOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Cards
Emulation . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-11, 8-47 - 8-48
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-11, 8-47 - 8-48
Installing . . . . . . . . 8-10 - 8-11, 8-13, 8-47
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-48 - 8-49
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
When to replace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Cleaning,Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Clear warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-48
I - 2
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLOSE MANUAL FEED TRAY . . . . . . 9-1
CMS
See Color management systems
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, A-2
Application notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
QMS announcements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Concurrent interfaces
See SIO
Configuration
See Menu
Collating
Chunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Disk space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54, 5-12
Collation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 5-12
Collation option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54, 5-12
Color
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Pantone chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
See also QCOLOR
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Uneven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Color management systems . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Color model
Configuration menu
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
When to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Configuration, printer
Using applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using DOC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using HP PCL 5C commands . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using HP-GL commands . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using PostScript commands . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using printer commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using PS Executive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Connection
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
LocalTalk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 4-26
LocalTalk interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Consumables
Contaminating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Developer cartridges . . . . . . 6-2 - 6-3, B-7
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Measurement . . . . 6-4, 6-7, 6-10, B-7, G-3
Non-QMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Oil Bottle/Cleaning Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
OPC belt cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Toner cartridges. . . . . . . . . . 6-2 - 6-3, B-7
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7, B-9 - B-10
Context switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, D-7
Contrast
Full color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Monochrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Color Model menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Color rendering dictionaries . . 1-7, 4-29, 7-10
Business. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Colorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Photographic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
See also Photographic, Colorimetric, Business
Color Separation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Colorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Colorimetric CRD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29, 7-10
Communication
Between the printer and a Macintosh. . 3-3
Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Testing, Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Testing, PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Communications menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
AppleTalk option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Emul Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
ESP Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Job Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Network Interface option . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
PS Wait Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Timeouts option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Compile-ahead processing . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Compressed data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Print density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cancel key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
I n d e x
I - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keypad language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Media key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Menu key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Message window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 9-1
Next key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Online/Offline key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Previous key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Select key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 9-1
Tray select key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
When to use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, B-2
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Controller, type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Copies menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Courier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33, 7-18, B-2
CRDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Crown . . . . . . 1-9, 3-23, 4-2, 4-31, 4-52, G-1
Compile-ahead processing . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Compressed data format . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Configurable memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Context switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Multitasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
SIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Spooling overflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Technical reference. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, B-8
Curl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Defaults
Halftone option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Preventing changes to . . . . . . . . . 4-8, 4-50
Restore factory. . . . . . 4-2, 4-50, 9-26, D-3
DEV LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7, 9-1
Developer
Contaminating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Measurement . . . . 6-4, 6-7, 6-10, B-7, G-3
Planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Spills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Developer cartridge
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 6-9
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Securing latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
When moving printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
DEVELOPER UNIT MISINSTALLED. . 9-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
DIN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Identifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Internal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52, B-3
Loading emulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Loading fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
SCSI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 - B-3
SCSI port . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 3-11, 8-43
Disk cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Disk Cache option
D
See K Mem Disk Cache option
Data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Data LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21, 9-24
Dataproducts
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Conversion kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33, B-8
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Shunts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
DB25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Declaration, Manufacturer/Importer. . . . . C-2
DECnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28
Disk location option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Disk Operations menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Collation option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Format Disk option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Install Option option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Installing upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Location option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Remove Option option. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Size (Meg) option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Spool Overflow option . . . . . . . 4-53, D-10
Disk space
I - 4
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Collating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Display list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Dithering
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 - 8-11
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-48 - 8-49
Emulation Sensing Processor
Printer default style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Do Error Handler option. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Do Start Page option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Do Sys Start option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
DOC
See ESP mode
Emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 8-10, B-2
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Context switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Emulations menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
See also ESP, Hexdump, HP-GL, HP PCL 5C,
LN03+, PostScript
HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Memory, temporary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
PostScript. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Emulations menu
ESP Default Emul option . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
ESP option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25
Hexdump option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25
HP PCL 5C option. . . . . . 4-22, 4-25, 4-33
HP-GL option . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25, 4-31
Lineprinter option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
LN03+ option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25
PostScript option . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25, 4-28
End job mode
See Document Option Commands
Document Option Commands . . . . . . . . . 4-2
DOCs supported by printer . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, B-8
Documentation
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 - 1-5, B-8
DOC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, B-8
Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
HP PCL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, B-8
HP PCL 5C technical notes. . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Network notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, B-8
Printer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
PS Executive Series Utilities. . . . . . . . 1-11
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Technical reference. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, B-8
DOS commands, mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Drivers
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Windows, installing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Drivers folder
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Energy Saver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 4-49
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Noise level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Power switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Print method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, B-1
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Warm-up time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Engine menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Clear Warning option . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-48
Default Paper option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Energy Saver option . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 4-49
Image Alignment option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Inputbin 1 Name option. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Inputbin 2 Name option. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Jam recovery option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Manfeed Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Outputbin Name option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
PDX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
PPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8
Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
E
EfiColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Electrical requirements
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, B-3
Electronics emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Emissions
Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Laser radiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Temporary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Emulation card . . . . . 8-10, 8-12, 8-48 - 8-49
I n d e x
I - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resolution option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Enhanced mode (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Envelope jams, preventing . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Envelopes
Removing an emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
SCSI port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
F
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Envelopes, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Degree of slant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, B-4
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Error Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Error Messages
Change printer name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Error page, trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Error recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
ESP
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8, 4-22, 4-25
ESP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 3-23
Default option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28, B-8
EtherTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28, B-8
ETX/ACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Executive
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Expand mode (HP-GL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Exterior cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
External hard disk . . . . . 1-13, 8-43, B-3, B-8
Controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Formatting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Identifying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Installing a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Installing an emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Loading emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Loading fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Removing a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Factory defaults
Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50, 9-26, D-3
FCC compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Features, printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
File storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 4-23 - 4-24
Font Cache
PostScript. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
Font card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 - 8-11
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 - 8-11
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-48 - 8-49
Fonts
Bitmapped PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Downloadable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Downloading . . . . . 1-11, 1-13, 9-24 - 9-25
HP PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
HP PCL printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Lineprinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30, B-2
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
PostScript. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
PostScript, memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Printer resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Resident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, B-2
Sample files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4, 3-13
Scalable PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Format Disk option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
FORMAT FAILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Formatting
External hard disk . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 - 8-45
Internal hard disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Frame Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 7-6 - 7-7
See also Halftones
FUSER OIL EMPTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
FUSER OIL LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12, 9-2
Fuser unit
Life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Pressure-release pieces . . . . . . . 2-20, 6-22
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
I - 6
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Horizontal lines
G
Sharp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Host Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Host input buffer
Gamma correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Gamut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
See K Mem for Spool
Hot ports
H
Halftones
See SIO
HP PCL
Technical reference . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-33
Typefaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
HP PCL 5
Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Screen lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Halftones, printer default
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Handling printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Hard disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3, D-9
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-43, B-8
Formatting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 - 8-45
Identifying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Installing a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Installing an emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
See Internal
Loading emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Loading fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Read error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Reformatted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Removing a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Removing an emulation . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
SCSI port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Write error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Hard disk kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Hdwe Flow Ctl
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Header inputbin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Header page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Header Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Heavy stock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Media menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
See Thick stock
Technical Reference . . . . . . 1-5, 4-33, B-8
HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, B-2
Default font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Default Font Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Download Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Line Termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Lines per inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Monochrome GL/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Point Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Retain Temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Scalable Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25
Symbol set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
HP PCL 5C technical notes. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
HP-GL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23, B-2
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Enhanced mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Expand mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Origin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Pens 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Reverse image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Scaling percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Scaling plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Technical reference . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-2
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
I
IBM PC
Helvetica. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Helvetica Condensed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Helvetica Narrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Hexdump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25, B-2
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25
AT cable pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
XT cable pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
IDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
IDLE INPUT PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Ignore parity, serial interface . . . . . . . . . 4-23
I n d e x
I - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image
Partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Too small. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Image, not centered
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
ITC Bookman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
ITC Zapf Chancery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
ITC Zapf Dingbats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
See Alignment
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5, G-2
Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11, 9-31, 9-33
Not centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Physical limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Software limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Incomplete jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
INITIALIZING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
INNER JAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2, 9-9
Inputbin
J
Jam recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Enabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Jams
See Paper jams
Job timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Inputbin 1, naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Inputbin 2, naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Inputbin menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Install Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Installation menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Admin Password submenu . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Operator Passwrd submenu. . . . . . . . . 4-15
Use Admin Pwd submenu. . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Use Operator Pwd submenu . . . . . . . . 4-16
Installing
Cleaning pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Developer cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 6-9
Emulation card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Font card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Oil bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
OPC belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
System software . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-51, G-4
Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-51
Waste toner pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Intel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Interfaces
K
K Mem Disk Cache option . . . . . . . 4-44, D-8
K Mem Display option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
K Mem Emul Tmp option . . . . . . . . 4-44, D-7
K Mem Emulation option . . . . . . . . 4-43, D-6
K Mem for PSHeap option . . . . . . . 4-43, D-5
K Mem for Spool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
K Mem for Spool option . . . . . . . . . 4-43, D-5
K Mem Framebuff option . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
K Mem PS Fonts option . . . . . . . . . 4-43, D-6
Kanji Option Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Keys
See Control panel
Kodak ColorSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
L
Label
Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Labels
Error recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Imageable region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Landscape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Languages
Choosing emulation for. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 3-1, 4-28, B-2
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, B-2 - B-3
Internal hard disk . . . . . 1-13, 9-19, B-3, B-8
Identifying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Reformat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50, 8-52
See Emulations
Laser paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 5-11
See Paper
I - 8
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Laser Prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5, 9-25
Laser printing
Laser Prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
LaserWriter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
PrintMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
PS Executive Series Utilities. . . . . . . . . 3-4
Screen fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 3-4
System 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Terminating resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Testing communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Macintosh checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Main power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44, B-2
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Preventative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Manual
Typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Manual feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Manual Feed LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Manual Feed Size menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Manual-feed belts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Manuals
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Laser radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Laser safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
LaserWriter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5, 9-25
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Legal
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Letter
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Letterhead
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Line Termination, HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . 4-34
Lineprinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30, B-2
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Typefaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Lines per inch, HP PCL 5C. . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
LN03 Plus
Overview, user’s guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Manufacturer/Importer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Image placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, G-2
See also Imageable region
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25
Loading
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
LocalTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, B-2
See also AppleTalk
MB Printer Mem option . . . . . . . . . 4-45, D-9
Mechanical problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Changing size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Collating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Filling cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Heavy stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17, 5-11
Imageable regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Laser Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41, 5-2, 5-5
Loading cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Lower cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-1
Manual feed size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Output tray levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17
Recommended brands . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Cable pinouts for port . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Testing communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Location for printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Maximum slant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Weight capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Location, disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Lockup, printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Low-power mode
See Energy Saver mode
M
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Cable pinouts for serial port . . . . . . . . B-11
Change Printer Name message . . . . . . . 3-4
Communication with printer . . . . . . . . . 3-3
I n d e x
I - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17, 5-11
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-10, B-5
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Thick stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17, 5-8, 5-11
See also Transparencies
Transparency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Versatility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Media cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
See also Trays
Media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Cassette capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Inner jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Misfeed jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Outer jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Preventing . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11, 9-18 - 9-19
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . 5-11, 9-18 - 9-19
Media menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Memory
Allocating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Configurable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Downloading fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Host input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
PostScript fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
PostScript heap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
See also RAM,SIMMs
K Mem PS Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
MB Printer Mem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Alphanumeric values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Optional features in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Saving changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Selecting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
String values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 4-8
Menu key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Message LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Message window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 9-1
Micrografx Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Min K Spool
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Miscellaneous menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Permanent Changes option . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Restore Defaults option . . . . . . . . 4-50, D-3
MISFEED JAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-6
Missing Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Mode
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
LocalTalk interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
See also Printing modes or mode name
Spool buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22, B-3
Upgrade kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Virtual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43, D-5, D-9
Memory clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 - D-4
Memory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Memory menu
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
mode command (DOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Moiré . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Monochrome printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Moving the printer. . . . . 2-23, 6-18, 6-22, 8-1
Multitasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Allocating memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
K Mem Disk Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
K Mem Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
K Mem Emul Tmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
K Mem Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
K Mem for PSHeap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
K Mem for Spool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
K Mem Framebuff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
N
Names
Inputbin 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Inputbin 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Outputbin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Naming the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
National Service
I - 1 0
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Netware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Network administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Network Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, B-8
Networks. . . . . . . . . 1-4, 1-11, 3-1, 4-28, B-8
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 4-28
Optional interfaces . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 4-28
New Century Schoolbook. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Next key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Noise level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Notes
Manual Feed Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Operator Passwrd menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Optional (Lower) LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Optional accessories
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Dataproducts conversions . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Emulation cards . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-47 - 8-48
Font cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-47 - 8-48
Network interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Sheet feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Optional cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Optional features, configuration . . . . . . . 4-54
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 8-1 - 8-28, B-8
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54, 5-12
Dataproducts conversion kit . . . . . . . . B-8
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Emulation cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Ethernet interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Font cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Hard disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46, 4-53
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Network interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 4-28
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 8-13, B-8
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Spool overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Token-Ring interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Updated list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Warranty considerations . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Orientation
In manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Novell NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28
O
Oil bottle
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
When to replace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Oil Bottle/Cleaning Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
One-color printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Online LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Online/Offline key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
OPC belt
Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
OPC belt cartridge
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-11
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Light exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-10
Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Pressure release pin. . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 6-11
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-10
Temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tension release pin . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 6-11
When moving printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Operator Control menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Chain Inputbin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Collation submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Color Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Color Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Inputbin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Orientation menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Origin (HP-GL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
OUT OF OIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
OUTER JAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-14
Output tray
Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Media levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Output, collating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Outputbin, naming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
I n d e x
I - 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PS protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Spool timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Test file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Testing communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Password
Administration menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Operator Control menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
PC
Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 - 3-13
PS Executive Series Utilities. . . . . . . . 3-12
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Testing communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Testing parallel port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Testing serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
PC checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
PDF
P
Packing materials, in printer . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Page Description Languages
See Emulations
Pantone POCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Pantone Professional Color Toolkit . . . . 7-16
PANTONE® * Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Filling cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 5-11
Laser Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41, 5-2, 5-5
Lower cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-1
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Media menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17
See Paper jams
Plain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-11
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17, 5-11
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, B-5
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-11
Paper cassette
Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Paper exit plates, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Paper exit rollers, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Paper feed cassette
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
PDLs
See Emulations
PDX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8
Pens 1-8 (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Permanent Changes option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Phone numbers
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Photographic CRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Plain paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-11
See Paper
See Paper cassette
Paper jams
Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
OPC belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Ports
Error recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Jam recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Message stays on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Paper LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Paper type (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Paper-feed roller, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Parallel cable pinouts
See Interface
PostScript
Compatibility of printer. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Level 2 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Level 2 page description language . . . 1-12
PostScript VM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
PS Heap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25
Technical reference . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-2
PostScript emulation
Dataproducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Centronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . 3-11, 4-25, B-2
Data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Default interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
End job mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Min K Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Interpreter, memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
I - 1 2
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Level 1. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 4-29, 4-58, B-2
Level 2. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 4-29, 4-58, B-2
PostScript emulation mode. . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
PostScript emulation option . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
PostScript errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
PostScript font cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
PostScript operators
scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
showpage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17, 3-19
translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Power
Effect of resolution on. . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28, 9-30
Media storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Sharp horizontal lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Smudges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Specific problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
White lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Print status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Print Status option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Printable region
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Power cable
See Power Cord
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Power switches
See Imageable region
See Margins
Printer
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Daily operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 5-1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . B-4
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Level location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Locks up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 6-18, 6-22
Reinitialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Resets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 8-1, B-2
Printer body, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Printer configuration
Using applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using DOC commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using HP PCL 5C commands . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using HP-GL commands . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using PostScript commands . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using printer commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using PS Executive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Printer driver
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44, B-2
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44, B-2
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
PPD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8
Pre-charger unit, cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Pre-printed media
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Pressure release pin. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 6-11
Pressure-release pieces
Moving the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 6-22
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Previous key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Print density
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Print engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Noise level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Print method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, B-1
Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Warm-up time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Print quality
100K checkup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Blurry images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Dark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28, 9-30
Dark vertical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
See also Driver
PostScript emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Printer drivers
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
I n d e x
I - 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See Windows, installing
Printer emulations
Specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Printer options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Printer setup
Q
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 3-13, A-1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Application notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Printer specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
QCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 7-1
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Windows setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
QMS
Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Customer Technical Assurance . . . . . . A-2
FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
World-wide offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
QMS Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
QMS customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
QuarkXPress
Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Printing
Blank pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
In 600 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Incomplete jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Print quality problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Problem quick check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Service call messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Single sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Printing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
PRINTING STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
PRINTING TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
PrintMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Problems
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8
QuarkXPress 3.3
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Quick check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Quoted character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
See Troubleshooting
Product modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
PS Executive Series Utilities . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Printer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
PS Executive Utilities. . . . . . . 1-11, 3-4, 3-12
Color chart file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
PS protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10, D-12
Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Binary fixed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
For network interface cards. . . . . . . . . 4-28
Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Normal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Normal fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Quoted character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24, D-12
PS wait timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
PUT PAPER IN INPUT BIN . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
R
Radio emissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Radio frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Radio noise, Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
RAM
Allocating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-22
See also Memory
Requirements for 600 dpi . . . . . . . . . . B-1
See also SIMMs
Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Random Access Memory
See RAM
Rasterizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Rcv Sw Flow
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
READ ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
I - 1 4
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Register roller, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Registration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37, 5-21
Reinitialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Remote power Switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-44, B-2
Remove Option option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
REPLACE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10, 9-3
REPLACE FUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Replacement parts
Screen printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Screendumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
SCSI
See Disk
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 8-13
Select key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, B-2
Cable pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Data bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
End job mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Flow control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 - 4-24
Hdwe Flow CTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Ignore parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Min K Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
PS protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Rcv Sw Flow Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Spool timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Test file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Xmit Sw Flow Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Service
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Reprinting jammed pages . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Requirements
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Environmental. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Resident typefaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-13, 4-48, B-1
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-13, 4-48, B-1
Restore Defaults option . . . . . . . . . 4-50, D-3
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Return Merchandise Authorization
See RMA
International. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Service call
Reverse image (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
RMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Robust XON/XOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Placing a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Setup, printer
Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Sheet feeder
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Shipment
Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Missing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Shipping spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
showpage operator (PostScript) . . 3-17, 3-19
SIDE PANEL OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
S
SA media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Sample page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38, 5-21, 9-3
Sample Page option. . . . . . . . . . 4-38, 5-21
Saving changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Scalable PCL fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
scale operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Scaling percent (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Scaling plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Screen angles
Moiré. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Screen fonts
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 3-4
Screen lines
See also Frequency
I n d e x
I - 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mechanical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
See also Memory
Part number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
See also RAM
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO)
See SIO
Startup options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Startup Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Do Error Handler option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Do Start Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Do Sys Start option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Static electricity
See Electrostatic discharge
Status
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45, 5-19
Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
100K checkup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Adjust xxxxx bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Back panel open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Belt cartridge misinstalled. . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Cancelling job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Check waste toner . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14, 9-1
Close manual feed tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Dev low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7, 9-1
Developer unit misinstalled. . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuser oil empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuser oil low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12, 9-2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Idle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Idle input printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Inner jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Message window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 9-1
Misfeed jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Out of oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Outer jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Printing status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Printing test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Put paper in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Replace belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10, 9-3
Replace fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Side panel open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Toner empty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Top cover open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Waiting on input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Warming up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
X active jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
X toner cartridge empty. . . . . . . . . 6-4, 9-3
Status page
Single In-line Memory Module
See SIMMs
SIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Size (Meg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Sizes
Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-10, B-5
SLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-51, G-4
Smears, transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Smudges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Software
Macintosh application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Space requirements, printer . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Special Pages menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Header Inputbin option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Header Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Print Status option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Registration Page option . . . . . . 4-37, 5-21
Sample Page option. . . . . . . . . . 4-38, 5-21
Status Page Type option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Trailer Inputbin option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Trailer Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Spills
Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14, 6-20
Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Spool buffer
AppleTalk interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Spool buffers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Spool overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Spool Overflow option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Spool timeout, serial interface . . . . . . . . 4-23
Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Standard (Upper) LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Start-Up page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Status Page Type option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
I - 1 6
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Storage
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Pressure-release pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Supplies
Timeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Manual feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
PS Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Token-Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28, B-8
Toner
Adjusting density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Contaminating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Darken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Lighten. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Measurement . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-7, B-7, G-3
Planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Spills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Toner cartridge
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Extend life of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
When moving printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
TONER EMPTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
TOP COVER MISINSTALLED . . . . . . . 9-3
TOPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Trailer inputbin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Trailer page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Trailer Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
translate operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Error recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Imageable region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Lower cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-1
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Quality of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17, 5-11
Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, B-5
Smears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11, B-6
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Transparency
See Consumables
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
QMS bulletin board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Technical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 - A-4
Switches
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
System administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
System failure, reload system software . 8-51
System memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
System software, installing. . . 1-8, 8-51, G-4
System Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
T
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28
Technical Notes, HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Technical Reference . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-2, B-8
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Document Option Commands. . . . . . . . 4-2
HP PCL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 4-33
HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Temporary emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Tension release pin . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 6-11
Testing, PC
Parallel port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Text files, won’t print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Thick stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-11
Media menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Tickmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47, 5-20
Media menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17
Transparency LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Tray
See also Cassette
I n d e x
I - 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See also Media cassette
See Media, cassette
Tray Select key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Troubleshooting
Side panel open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Smudges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Start-up page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Status message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Status page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Top cover open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Write error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
X ACTIVE JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Typefaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Avant Garde. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Bookman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Courier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Helvetica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Helvetica Condensed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Helvetica Narrow. . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 - 7-19
HP PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
ITC Zapf Chancery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
ITC Zapf Dingbats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
New Century Schoolbook . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Resident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
100K checkup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Adjust xxxxx bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Back panel open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Belt cartridge misinstalled. . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Blank pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Blurry images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Call for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Cancelling job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Check waste toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Close manual feed tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Dark vertical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Data LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21, 9-24
Developer unit low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Developer unit misinstalled. . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Double feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
ESP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Fuser oil empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Image not centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Incomplete Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Inner jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2, 9-9
Installing print system software . . . . . 8-51
Internal hard disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Jam recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Macintosh applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Mechanical problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 - 9-19
Misfeed jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-6
Missing dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Outer jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-14
Paper jam message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Print quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Printer resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Quick check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Read error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Reinitialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Replace belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Replace Fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Service calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
U
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Upgrades, installing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-51
US National Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Utilities
See PS Executive Series Utilities
V
Vendors
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Ventura Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Windows version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Vertical lines
Dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Vfg 1046/1984 conformity . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Virtual memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5, D-9
See K Mem for PS Heap
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
I - 1 8
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to replace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 8-1
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, B-2
Windows driver
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
WordPerfect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
WRITE ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
W
WAITING ON INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Warm-up time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
WARMING UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Warnings
In manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Warranty
Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 - B-10
Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Non-QMS accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Non-QMS consumables . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Repairs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Waste toner pack
X
X ACTIVE JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
x DEV LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
X TONER EMPTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 9-3
Xmit Sw Flow
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
XON/XOFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Robust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
I n d e x
I - 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
♦
I - 2 0
I n d e x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Graco Baby Swing 1750853 User Manual
Grizzly Lathe G9972Z User Manual
Grundig CRT Television Vision 6 26 6840 T User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Food Warmer 67137 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Trimmer 90757 User Manual
Harman Kardon Home Theater System HS 350 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Computer Drive 5000I User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard TV Converter Box 8590 D series User Manual
Humminbird Fish Finder 1197C SI User Manual
Iiyama Computer Monitor PLT1500 User Manual